Home

Chrysler 300SRT Automobile User Manual

1. Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 420 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter m Change the engine oil and engine oil H Rotate tires filter L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner J Rotate tires filter and replace if necessary I Inspect the rear axle fluid Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot
2. 072610692 3 Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow which is toward the rear of the vehicle text and arrows on the filter will indicate this 072610693 A C Air Filter Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper mainte nance intervals Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonab
3. sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more EM than one person no matter what their size Pulling Out the Lap Shoulder Belt Latch Plate uA dd E d 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and Plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt adjust the front seat go around your lap 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch WARNING plate into the buckle until you hear a click e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued a Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 WARNING Continued tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the
4. 0000 173 EL ALLE Md O Sunroof Fully Closed ss ug ser EES rmm 173 oe E He W Electrical Power Outlets ese se see 174 General Information 5 44 seks aoe RR 170 MCupholders cese eene 177 ll Power Sunroof If Equipped 171 EVP font Seat Cuplioldels 1122408348806 Eb S 177 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 180 El Rear Seat Capholders iis kes Eie 177 Ee METEENS HOE ET EET N 178 HConsole Features 2 ce E ope RR Rein 178 Gar Olea nu y aa oes PRG een ya ce 179 ll Cargo Area Features D Trunk Mat If Equipped Bl Rear Window Features O Rear Window Defroster 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Mirror This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean NE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex ou
5. 300 O Anti Lock Brake System ABS 301 B Traction Control System TCS 301 O Brake Assist System BAS 302 O Electronic Stability Program ESP 302 E5vmehronzing ESP 245 exu xo CREE 306 o ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light And Bory ICS Indicator Meat iss web nee oord DE 306 N Tire Safety Information 307 O Tire Markings 224944 dawg ER e pk 307 O Tire Identification Number TIN 3I O Tire Terminology And Definitions 312 O Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 313 NS TA TING AND OPERATING 273 H Tires General Information 317 W Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 326 UCT esse ng we Goo gona HE UR ee EN AT 317 Trem ie Oys 445 aces ER AE es ee ae ii 328 O Tire Inflation Pressures 318 O General Information ss sy ak Rees 992 O Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 319 MB Fuel Requirements 333 EcL Ty Wiles iis age tee ED AE DRS 320 OAL ENG are datus a seem d HAS HEDE E 333 O De PUM ti eka EROR RERO AURIS ESSE 320 B Reformulated Gasoline O Tread Wear Indicators ia se cen DRR o2 O Gasoline Oxygenate Blends alie Ti usus asm par RES SEERDE 022 oO E85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 334 E Replacement Mites se ie ie s paws ones mae 322 AMMI Gasoline anc4 eas nra het md 335 B Snow Tires 02 SE ES eee ee 323 O Materials Added To Fuel 335 H T
6. 147 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 149 MEROCUCTION x exce Eod RR CRT DERE REPE XS RAS EP 4 JUMP SINS usobe ctucbe a qd tended Boece wes 355 Key TOCTAMIMING a peace bb on ges ee sagas as a 17 Key Keplaaement snr EER 644 piri es RER RO E 16 Key sentry Hamobilizet sese ses er d eo EE 15 Key DIIS emincdef ss ow AD e don E b Rei 15 Keyless Entry System ios done Aa ee ED doni aos 20 kels GO PP 12 212 276 Keys 28 zscide unes dud esurire qa AE ED des 12 Kicker Sound System 2x3 e kg od Re Ee tipis 257 Knee Bolster esseere was 99924994 cd 949 53 Lane Change and Tun Signals 6235 xem 145 Lane Chance Assist 4444545 burke eer PERS 146 Lap onoulder Belts sessie one SEE GR de ows 44 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 004 73 74 eaten Piste 444444424 44 eas BEERS ee oes P 45 luc P 83 1000 2452259 REPE eh ete ANA SP eee 140 Lead Free Gasoline 24642624 649 045 FRE ON d 333 Leaks Fluid web oe oe eos hos eo See BE 83 LeO lies 644 2999 99 9 9 39 9 2 RD eas HE BAD Bs 022 Light bulle Pr T PE 83 406 hinc TPC 83 141 AIDS si son aa deris RED a HEN 61 66 81 191 Lu Ki AAR 5655 EE OR 190 300 Automatic Headlights is a 4c esca pom m rs 142 Brake Assist Warning 2 2822 306 Drake Warning os mewkaeee due EVER DE 192 297 Bulb Replacement a oa sans N rariss 406 407 SOURCSy ReAUING ua ts seeded tti Gow N oe 146 164 dur ASTE RE EAE ee bee 189 Day ER UMN i o a ows ER Ret OR AN 144
7. 334 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol E85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold driveability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 335
8. 9005 Front Dark Turn Lamp s es uc s dein 3157AK Pront Fog Lampe sua AE EE AE EN PSX24W Front Side Marker W5W Serviced at Authorized Dealer Tal Siop LAU has be TO M Bee 3057 Jal Lamp TT 3057 T r oignal Eie ae ce pee heh a Pe ots PT 3757A BackUp Lamp x uas hobo dori XC Hoge ha 3057 Center High Mount Stop Lamp CHMSL EBD ISI ee oe WOW N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 BULB REPLACEMENT 2 Remove the two fasteners from the back of the tail Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp and lamp assembly Park Turn Lamp High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlight switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service NOTE When HID headlamps are turned on there is a blue hue to the lamps This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges ee 4 Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the tail lamp assembly 3 Pull back the trunk liner Tail Stop Tail Turn Signal Lamp and Backup Lamp 1 Open the trunk 5 Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 6 Disconnect the electrical connector 8 Turn the appropriate bulb and socket
9. Cargo Area The 60 40 split folding rear seat provides cargo carrying versatility The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters When the seats are folded down they provide a continuous nearly flat extension of the load floor WARNING The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in per sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When the seatback is folded to the upright position make WARNING Continued sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the e To help protect against personal injury passengers seatback above the seat strap should not be seated in the rear cargo area The WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into Position the seat will not provide the proper CARGO A
10. 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Infants and Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren WARNING Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats
11. CHR 2300 300 OWNER S MANUAL SRT o m O REEDE e e Ls Le INTRODUCTION sit ees Be n ER WK RE eae ea ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING sesse ss see sesse TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTENTS B Introduction B How To Use This Manual 4 Vehicle Modifications Alterations INTRODUCTION Mi Warnings And Cautions 6 4 INTRODUCTION See INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high guality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acguaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publica tions carefully Following the instructions and recom mendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings
12. Continued e TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex In case of allergic reaction or rash consult a physician im mediately Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children If swallowed rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water Do not induce vomiting Consult a physician immedi ately Use the gloves provided in the Accessory Storage Compartment located on the bottom of the air pump when operating the TIREFIT kit Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT A Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT 1 Pull over to a safe location and turn ON the vehicle s Hazard Warning flashers 2 Verify that the valve stem on the wheel with the deflated tire is in a position that is near to the ground This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses 6 and 7 to reach the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding 3 Place the transmission in PARK auto transmission or in Gear manual transmission and turn OFF the ignition 4 Set the parking brake B Setting Up to Use TIREFIT 1 Remove the gloves from the Accessory Storage Com partment located on the bottom of the air pump and place them on your hands 2 Turn the Mode Select Knob 5 to the Sealant Mode position N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 351 3
13. Continued transmission damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 362 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M CAUTION Continued Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly e Do not push or tow this vehicle with another The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this vehicle on a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the ignition must be placed in the RUN position not the ACC position Make certain the transmission remains in NEUTRAL MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Engine Compartment 6 1L 365 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD I 366 O Loose Fuel Filler Cap sesse RR ROES ge 366 N Emissions Inspection And Maintenance PROCESS ee Pear d a nae oe ee ed ee dr d 367 W Replacement Parts 368 W Dealer Service 0000 06 368 Bl Maintenance Procedures 369 BEG Me OW 2 25 2400600 REST MED BRA VERS 370 O Engine QU Pier an xou ee OR EER s 372 O Engine Air Cleaner Filter vase ha 372 O Maimtenance Free Battery s cesser dar Rs 373 O Air Conditioner Maintenance 375 O A C Air Filler een 0 Body Lubrication o Windshield Wiper Blades 378 o Adding Washer Fluid ss ou Fa eet Sees 979 HLExhaustSyslel 142593049
14. Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 425 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signatu
15. Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M from your Uconnect Phone paired cellular phone to the e When prompted say List Phones Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Sve button and say Transfer Call e The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to Connect or Disconnect Link Between the the lowest priority To select or delete a paired Uconnect Phone and Cellular Phone phone being announced press the vm button and Your cellular phone can be paired with many different say Select or Delete Also see the next two sec electronic devices but can only be actively connected tions for an alternate way to select or delete a with one electronic device at a time paired phone If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth Select Another Cellular Phone connection between a Uconnect Phone paired cellular This feature allows you to select and start using another phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions phone paired with the Uconnect Phone described in your cellular phone User s Manual e Press the Se button to begin List Paired Cellular Ph N ist Paired Cellular Phone Names e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say e Press the amp button to begin Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e After the Ready prompt and the fo
16. RBZ Radio O Clock Setting Procedure RER REN Radio ui ues denda REPE 40 ll Media Center 130 RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack O Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play usce na re O Notes On Playing MP3 Files O Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode ll Media Center 130 RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack And Sirius Radio ees O Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MPS Audio Play iis ateis Ha erst es o Notes On Playing MP3 Files 62504946455 O List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play D Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Bl Universal Consumer Interface UCI 0 5 TPE QUIPPCd ss 4 aede mod ea he PAS Bee 4 EU Connects Tie bod ii n gam x eriarsti N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 O Using This Feature D Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons o Play Mode O List Or Browse Mode Bl Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped REN RER RES Radios Only D System Activation o Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID O Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode O Satellite Antenna O Reception Quality 248 249 250 292 292 299 295 253 254 O Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedi
17. Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Clock Setting Procedure RER REN Radio Uconnect gps RER Only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To Manually Set the Clock RER REN 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour bac
18. When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your Satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual d W A M 7 aa WATER IN FUEL EE dt ge B NJ nn bag DELG ER TER ER Xt De 2 dad TURN SMM ALE ee ENT More at Xt 0 e 3 dae FUEL REAR WIND i73 d AA Le Un Add POWER OUTLET ETI ty red ns BEAT WIRY LIFT THER Ln m INTERMITTENT WIPER rv 5 _ 8N ND cq D ae vd amp bi FUEL FLL Sine ae Tr n CA Powe Loar PROT REM LIGHT HOGD RELEASE LIER ium RECIRCLILAT OW CONVERTED F FLUR LEVEL OUTLET d WOW DOW To TEE 00 j y r m eM Vi EF apf i Wisi phai LIFTOATE RELEASE ELEK Ta ENGINE CIL REAR WINDOW ELECTUCALL FARE LIGHTE BEAR FOG LAMP AMDLIFTGATE DEFROST AMO 60 VEMILATIMG FAN WIHDOWLDOCK THROTTLE WEATED OFEN LOWER AR OUTLET CONTROL m y v Qs 3k BU amp VOICE BATTERY HEATED MRA WEMEL SEAT BELT fing
19. and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supporte
20. e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automati cally downloads your cellular phone s phonebook 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Cellular Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the cellular phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones To call a name from downloaded or Uconnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection
21. A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 422 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service 42 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter m Change the engine oil and engine oil H Rotate tires filter L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner J Rotate tires filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 423 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter _I Rotate tires L1 Inspect the rear axle fluid Odo
22. Head Restraints sinies VERRE KEER Gee Me 130 Head RESTS Cr ET 130 Liesdli hie Washers ie ER EE KERR AME DRR oe oh 379 Lied ol T ROKER EE 407 Automati 2454 24444485056 de 4464455505 142 Bulb Replacement 4 229 25 ED 624 ease e454 407 KEND Tcr rm 396 pc TL 144 LUSD Beam eis ue gow dinee 8 Baba ee ACORN A 146 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 146 Inte On Renner was d 2 39 o ae tens Eats 144 On Will Wipers vias sed rore RES 45 142 150 Iss ORE da wadp deas Nie ones 146 vil 141 jsp Pr nm 144 EE IE RAATS AE OE EE SS 379 Heated Mirrors SS SS ss SS ees 93 Heated Seats ers 43549344 3943x335 353 i52 Heater Engine BOCK Lors iom odios PR VEERA RES 280 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 146 Holder Coin Holder Cup HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 452 INDEX M Hood Release 0 ce eee es 140 LOM eas ee bure SE ee m 14 NY m 12 14 Igubon Key Removal quedas e bore ag tea e a 14 Dh nundbed En ses ee soos ene RE SS ES 19 Immobilizer Sentry Key peccnatac iS 2 baad Ges 15 Infant Restraint eee 69 70 Information Center Vehicle 199 Instrument Cluster een 188 189 Instrument Panel and Controls 187 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 246a xr kn 396 Integrated Power Module Fuses 398 Interior Appearance Care exes RE deban wor ede eae 395 licer M
23. MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 312 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Terminology and Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door of a four door vehicle running from the sill to the roof Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or KPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A pap
24. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you 202 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Shallow Standing Water CAUTION Continued Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water e Driving through standing water may cause dam age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not con before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehic
25. Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio ru Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played 042305233 SEEK Buttons RES RSC Radio Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch TUNE SCROLL O 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in Understanding The Fea tures If Your Vehicle Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect P
26. Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 and then remove the yellow cap from the fitting at the end of the hose 4 Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire 5 Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 onto the valve stem 6 Uncoil the Power Plug 8 and then insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet NOTE Do not remove foreign objects e g screws or nails from the tire C Injecting TIREFIT Sealant into the deflated tire e Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE FIT kit NOTE Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the shifter in NEUTRAL e After pressing the Power Button 4 the sealant white fluid will flow from the Sealant Bottle 1 through the Sealant Hose 6 and into the tire NOTE Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire If the sealant white fluid does not flow within 0 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn OFF the TIREFIT kit Disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem Make sure the valve stem is free of debris Reconnect the Sealant Hose 6 to the valve stem Check that the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the sealant mode position and not air mode Press the Power Button 4 to turn ON the TIREFIT kit 352 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 2 Connect the Power Plug 8 to a different 12 Volt power outlet in y
27. Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter When this feature is turned on and the vehicle is equipped with the Passive Entry system using the Pas sive Entry system to UNLOCK the vehicle will cause the parking lights to flash The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information To Lock the Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Passive Entry System If Equipped under Door Locks for further information Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter or locked using the Passive Entry door handle lock button This feature can be turned on or turned off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information To Unlatch the Trunk Press
28. battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 021305151 e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back Battery Replacement housing or the printed circuit board 1 Battery Access Door 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 Reposition the access door panel over the battery opening and snap into place General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Key
29. compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the HOME button for approximately two seconds 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3 Press the SCROLL button until Calibrate Compass displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration The message CAL will display in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass head ing NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Cell Phones Lap tops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings NUS 6 7 8 LA 040506040 Compass Variance Map 1 Turn the ignition switch ON NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 2 Press and hold the HOME button for approximately two seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until Compass Vari
30. decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED CAUTION The engine block heater warms the engine and permits Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a ing precautions are not observed standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to grounded three wire extension cord a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power is at idle speed Module Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 281 CAUTION Continued General Information The automatic transmission selects individual gears au e Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL tomatically dependent upon into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed e Altitude e Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot e Vehicle loading is firmly on the brake pedal o e Driving style WARNING e Shift lever position It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or Accelerator position NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the v
31. language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries Oey arie e The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say book entries if available Phonebook Erase All e Press the button to begin e To call one of the names in the list press the VR e The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you button during the playing of the desired name and wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook say Call e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete deleted operations at this point 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your
32. of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are
33. size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT eee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in 310 STARTING AND OPERATING M EXAMPLE 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load correspon
34. throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 WARNING Maintaining Your Airbag System Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot WARNING protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer immediately Also have the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC system serviced as well e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Continued 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued Airbag Warning Light Yo
35. vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retrofit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle All three rear s
36. water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped
37. with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seat cover material Then rotate the tether anchorage cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor age being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions NOTE e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing
38. 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter _I Rotate tires _J Replace the spark plugs L1 Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 60 months Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 428 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES See 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service 114 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter H Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter Replace the engine air cleaner filter Rotate tires Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the br
39. DOOR ho AL GOW DATIONING DECOR hITRON EHARDING DEFROST uini sq ad BUTTON m a W Li we cw he e sO ER AWCHORE ia mei Pi iim POWER TELS PAPER Eine ARAAG imaan SIDA Diis E bii TER kp oer FoR ope STEERING FLU nen CHLDWIEN LATCH srs X m C EP GE AIRBAG rip Aa sd AA a MALI UNETION EMGME COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSEMSER COOR AJAR OOWWVER TLE CONVERTIBLE BEE OWNER uec ATDR LIGHT m xD TEMPERATURE BEETHANIT SYETEM ARBA GFF TOP OWN TOR die NO AWA n INTRODUCTION 5 ELECTRONIC STABILITY ELECTRO PROGRAM URARE EPEED CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM GRAAL 2 D BRAKE SYSTEM HILL DESCENT WARNING PARKING CONTROL BRAKE awor fe ALL WHEEL FAR LIFE IF aT DRIVE ETIAHIMC UZIEM AWD BRAKE BAAKE Ty STEM FOUH WHEEL WAR MM EG PARTING DRIVE BRAKE TOW HAUL WA Fh C TOW HALL 4 LOW WAZAAD FOUR WHEEL DANE Low AIC PUSH e Am Eg vaN men CONTHOL OFF 010507683 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This numbe
40. Dimmer Switch Headlight 145 146 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 306 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 195 Engine Temperature Warning 190 oin APP DC oes eh ee eae oe 83 HOS wate thas Oo oes HEES ER DE 145 189 Ne INDEX 453 Hazard Warme Plasher aus bu GE REESE EYCH 344 HeadleHlt DIER aeu p auk SOR E bho Heese 141 ole elite ARE N EER EDE ON ET 141 407 Headlights On Reminder 144 Headlights On With Wipers 142 150 Fire Bean PP 146 195 Tigh Besin Mdicalor ua a deae pars Satan 9d 195 Huminated E 2s aso duxere timetis 19 Instrument Cluster sn 141 189 Intensity Conio 24 6445 sak R RR EE eae dcs 147 linca A PCT 147 164 En rm A10 Lights Om RKEMINdEr vos oek doa dp oe me ee Ps 144 Low Tael 2226952345059 34299 0 294 13 125 189 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 198 Map Readings 2x oue ARE iden AR ER d 146 164 OU DPIBSSHIS aor ira ded RR ENE APE EER RR RE 199 Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 148 cc PT 146 454 INDEX NEE id Readings sies 9 ROI ESTEE SA OE ous 146 164 Seat Belt Reminder SS SS SS SS 195 Rc MEM RETRKRTRRCTETTTTTTTTTRRTEIT 406 407 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 198 MT IEENS oos 4 465 bag ee ee ee ee ROES 143 Tire Pressure Monitoring IPMS 196 526 Traction Control uos 2404 Roe p E eS ea ROS RR EOS 306 Turn DESI ie Sd acta d eR Ro Sere ee TER 83 145 189 NIE M
41. FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF posi tion Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Sunroof Fully Closed Press the power sunroof switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEH
42. Fob Remote Keyless x2 Entry RKE transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start e Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may reduce this range NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 How to Use Remote Start NOTE With Keyless Go the remote start feature will All of the following conditions must be met before the operate with the Start Stop button installed in the igni engine will remote start tion switch e Shift lever in PARK WARNING e Doors closed e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or e Hood closed confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car e Trunk closed NP bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious e Hazard switch off injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start e Ignition key removed from ignition switch System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e Dattery at an acceptable charge level e RKE PANIC button not pressed 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 will chirp
43. Gas Cap Tether Hook ee STARTING AND OPERATING 339 WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 340 STARTING AND OPERATING M VEHI
44. HE 337 P COLONI SR MEE EE ER EE EN 935 Clean Aif secs eet oe ORE Aa DR ER AE DOER 333 Ethanol 9s dme uA EE EE NE OE 334 Fuller Cap Gas Cap 3 499 9093049 3 998 ED DEd 337 ecce TCU 333 GUE sus ose Bee Re eS 195 Matenas Added 23 9929 8 Exe sehen DS ES 335 Methanol m 334 Octane RUNE sese dex REX cat gut dee d 333 413 KEGUINCINCUIS 2252456 URE KEER OR ELE RR 333 PPeCHICANIONS oa oases KI FP ees Be N 413 Tank Capacity ua otros asad thn ttre SERE 412 Lael SIEHE EO ueserwae pd ue dr Em e 338 Igi Pr C C P 337 Do MEER ETE OE ETE Oe 398 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 164 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 337 366 Gasoline Clean Air eese 333 Gasoline Fuel 244642444 vecevese ea Shade 333 Gasoline Reformulated 333 Gauges Coolant Temperature ike EE e haw SE ed 193 N INDEX 451 TEE ES OE eee N eee SD 195 DDOGHONMIDEIGE 22 5059 5299 542606444 HERE d 189 TACWOMCIG vane bathe eee ee ease OS 190 General Information 17 24 122 290 332 General Maintenance secs da RE EE RE 369 Glass ledig van 9 9 5 PRE MORA PCR Roh ego ARE E 396 Gross Axle Weight Rate rssi RARR eda 340 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 340 tll epee d ie coos eee co pees ee eg 340 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 93 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow prandine Water ii ones shee etna eh at 291 Hazard Warning Flasher as d suceso Rs 344
45. IE o Ed EE NN 146 W Adjustable Pedals ES ee o High Low Beam Switch 146 ME oe pe one o Flash To Pass 2218 2 d eh ER RE eg BSS s 146 M M E 4 Overhead Console Map Reading Lights 146 EL jo Set At A Desired Speed ed RE RAO 156 GInterior Lights 5 esses 147 ATODI toda 24 werd oa P Sew toe d 156 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 148 AE DEU ee idi O Intermittent Wiper System 149 a LE a SENSE BENE 149 H To Accelerate Por Passing sa adesso caer es 157 m RM 150 Bi Parksense Rear Park Assist 158 O Parksense System Usage Precautions 160 o Headlights On With Wipers 150 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie W Overhead Console 2 540 PEER ROER exa 163 O Opening Sunroof Express 172 O Courtesy Reading Lights 164 O Closing Sunroof Express 172 O Sunglasses Storage us each oho eee RR dos 164 O Pinch Protect Feature iuo sour en 172 lll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 164 O Pinch Protect Override Ls 172 O Programming HomeLink 166 O Venting Sunroof Express 172 O Gate Operator Canadian Programming 168 O Sunshade Operation i s exe e teg 173 E Using HomeLink uu suaeaasedores dk ea es 169 EVIL DUCE aeos adc Hoek DAL Rc er des 173 O Reprogramming A Single HomeLink LU5unroofMaintenanee sees e Rem 179 DUMOU M rm 169 D Tgnition Off Operation
46. INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI 0 5 IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code
47. ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recogni
48. Light sf hrs 367 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 79 Checks ale io BE HEER Bons eaS 79 Child Restraint siese esse EER ER 69 70 71 74 76 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 73 74 Child ately LOCKS ss age m 34 Clean Air Gasoline uus oie qoare tenes aaa 333 Cleaning lcg 394 Windshield Wiper Blades 378 Cime CONC suco ERA sante den aeons ees 263 eno q LT 221 222 224 227 236 COR Holder s a RR x Seeds X Ea dE DR 178 Cold Weather Operation ss sore hoe a he m2 278 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 262 Soups siene ER coped enone eeneges meen 215 Compass Calibration 444 an ye eae oN ee BRAK 215 Compass Variance x 245 5655 Rs x so RE Pre bE 214 Computer Trip Travel ias esce ad eter S RES 206 N INDEX 447 Connector WEL ENE egos OR eee EEE 247 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 247 Console Floor e m Kab os bee eh ae ee os 178 Console Overhead leen 163 Contract Service usce mae x ROS EUR eS ERE CR 437 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 385 COOMUMG oyle aie ah EERS ioi ERAS RR 382 Adding Coolant Antifreeze osse du v9 ees 384 ookal Capati ai ak euet qued des Di N oes 412 Coolant Level usum RE ko ma t3 dr vs 382 386 Disposal of Used Coolant 386 Drain Flush and Refill 383 IDSDPCHON xis s S hee eee EUER E eee ae 386 Points to Remember 0004 386 Die sie uasa dur SAD REED HER
49. Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of a collision your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment if applicable and up to a quarter second of either high speed deceleration data or change in velocity during and or after airbag deployment or near deployment EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and is otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler Group LLC such investigations may be re quested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such
50. SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or AC
51. Seat Belts 53 N INDEX 457 Pretensioners Seat Belts Programmable Electronic Features Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry Radial Ply Tires Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap Radio Operation Radio Remote Controls Radio Satellite Uconnect studios Rain Sensitive Wiper System Rear Cupholder Rear Park Sense System Rear Seat Folding Rear Window Defroster Rear Window Features Reclining Front Seats Recreational Towing Reformulated Gasoline 22 222 22 e ws 333 Ros 3444 on4ee ae ET OT OT OE OK 376 Release Hood oie ee 66 week dux oe PUE ed 140 Keminder Lights OU iese gin e o Reto p 144 Reminder Seat Belt lees 51 Remote Control PIAS VSN doses 4285 ee eee SEE wh ddr 24 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 62642046 ie eien 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 260 Remote Starting Syste 6444644300 44 pes So HY 24 Remote Trans Release a swa v osc ore DER RES SU 40 Replacement Bulbs s 44444 ys rave tiene ees 406 Replacement Keys sars raaire oe eae DAS HE 16 Replacement Paris 3 33 0 4993 41 607 4 RE kinis 368 Replacement Ties oi ea ed Eine RC ee neem 322 Reporting Safety Defects 0 438 Restraint Head Restraints Child Restraints Occupant 458 INDEX M Rocking Vehicle When Stuck iss Res 359 Rotation Tires uude de ER eee aS ERED ES 324 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 81 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 83 Safety Defects Re
52. Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel press and hold the brake pedal push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button once The starter motor will engage automatically run for 10 seconds and then disengage Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Clearing A Flooded Engine Using Fob With Integrated Key If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure 280 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
53. Synchronizing ESP see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light will turn on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned OFF previously The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when the ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation STARTING AND OPERATING 307 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings 1 U S DOT Safety Stan dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description SEP 054903773 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades 308 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S e Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire
54. This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the So button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the N button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the EVR button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the amp button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a si
55. WARNING WARNING Continued Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners e Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter fering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Continued ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns C
56. after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indica tor system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time Display Units of Measure in NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion e Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display w
57. an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE But
58. an engi neered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed F
59. as those associated with universities and with hospital and insur ance organizations 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler Group LLC regardless of initiative the com pany or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to image the data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the U S govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler Group LLC product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data parameters that are recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning
60. auTO ss eresie a Vd ate qs are dust 6 Warranty Information 2 5 ses p e voe t tom t oes 438 este Addis POM senres e PB aree SEED Bare 9 9 Washers Windshield 148 149 379 Washing VEN M oe eee MR ERA oe goa gee 393 Water Divine THOUGH asenenviaetaugeas seam 291 Wheel and Wheel IU uuu rk seeds 394 Wheel and Wheel Trim Cate is oi t dex 394 Wind Dueling sye REEKS EE DE 40 173 Window FOCCING reps ds 307 ERROR ERA RR HE 269 Nee INDEX 463 ke MED OE EE oe Se ars Of Windshield Wipers 3 5 393 99 R ES de v EE HRS 148 or C PTTT 37 Wiper Blade Replacement 52296 KERS NR RE 378 Windshield Defroster SS SES sn ol 6 Viper Deli wis sE GES A 34 ADA REK DRS ee 149 Windshield Washers 148 149 379 Wipers Intermittent 00 149 EIL greta ts SON AR RUPES A ee eee eae 9 9 Wipers Ram Sensitive 3233202 uc ded Sikes 150 Windshield Wiper Blades 378 CHRYSLER SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC AR 10C482 126 AC 3rd Edition Printed in U S A
61. be en abled or disabled For details refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety Two latches must be released to open the hood catch to the left The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel 818c748d eer Hood Safety Catch Use the hood prop rod if equipped to secure the hood in the open position Hood Release Lever N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 CAUTION LIGHTS Headlight Switch XE The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel This switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instru ment panel lights instrument panel light dimming inte 3 rior lights and fog lights To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi mately 6 in 15 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your
62. cellular phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the amp button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cellular phone Press the amp button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the VR button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep
63. chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON In addition the EVIC will display a low pressure message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the TPM Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 332 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will d
64. check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an authorized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 24 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of I C an onboard diagnostic system called OBD The OBD system monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems The MIL will turn on when the ignition is in the RUN position before engine start If the MIL does not come on when turning the key from OFF to RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required
65. deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 e Insects tree sap and tar e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing ve h iminish the gl hi h i e Salt in the air near seacoast localities pee diminish the gloss or thin out the paint e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing CAUTION e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with scratch metal and painted surfaces dee GP e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu paint and decals lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove Special Care e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint a month 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and
66. draw higher power i e coolers Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Continued vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 CUPHOLDERS Rear Seat Cupholders The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side by side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants elbows Front Seat Cupholders The cupholders are located in
67. e Refer to the Tire Placard for your vehicle s proper tire pressure TRAILER TOWING Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHONME ETC Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the driveshaft is removed Towing with the rear wheels on the ground while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe transmission damage WARNING If the driveshaft is removed the vehicle can roll even if the transmission is in PARK which could cause serious injury or death The parking brake must be firmly engaged and the wheels chocked during driveshaft removal and installa tion The parking brake must remain engaged unless the vehicle is securely and properly connected to the tow vehicle or the driveshaft is completely reinstalled See your authorized dealer for proper driveshaft removal and reinstallation procedures including flange orientation alignment use of thread locking compound proper bolt torque specifications etc WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Mi Hazard Warning Flasher 344 O Jump Starting Procedure 957 lB If Your Engine Overheats Ls 344 Wi Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 359 BURGER unns ges va EE d OE d 345 W Towing A Disabled Vehicle EV TIRERI SiQldee ss he eek terse a EED 346 O Without The Ignition Key FOB H TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation 346 o Towing This Vehicle Behind Another o
68. e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel 336 STARTING AND OPERATING M Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Continued CAUTION e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Follow these guide
69. engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze solution Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information Selection of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze Refer to F
70. light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system e Vehicle speed NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 e Engine RPM e Drake switch status e Pedal position e And other configuration Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it parameters depending on vehicle Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child
71. of lumbar support Turn the control lever for of a rear impact The head restraint should be adjusted so ward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired the top of the head restraint is located above the top of amount of lumbar support your ear To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the large button located on the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Lumbar Support Control Lever N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 gt 030907585 Adjustable Head Restraints Removing Head Restraint NOTE The rear head restraints are not adjustable To install the head restraint insert the head restraint rods into each guide apply pressure down on the headrest until the head restraint reaches the first lock position push the large button in and push down and adjust head restraint to desired position To remove the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint to it s highest position push in both buttons at the base of each head restraint rod and simultaneously pull up on the head restraint 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE Ensure that the front of the head restraint is facing toward the front of the vehicle WARNINCG Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision The head restraints re should
72. of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero This display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages when the appropriate conditions exist Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC for further information Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap message will display in the odometer display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL 7 Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red area 8 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light will turn on and a single chime will eee sound to warn of an overheated engine condition When this light turns on the engine temperature is critically hot The vehicle should be turned OFF immediately and serviced as soon as possible 9 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake S
73. original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper mainte nance intervals Remember more frequent rotation is permissible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to performing the tire rotation STARTING AND OPERATING 325 Tire Rotation Standard Tires Tire Rotation All Season Tires The suggested rotation method is the side to side as The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped shown in the following diagram with all season tires is the forward cross as shown in the following diagram EJ 7E CO EIE Tire Rotation 055703771 055705379 Tire R
74. press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being dis played To reset all resettable functions press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed func tion gt Reset ALL will display during this three second window Performance Pages If Equipped WARNING Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor mance Pages is intended for off highway or off road use only and should not be done on any public roadways It is recommended that these features be used in a controlled environment and within the limits of the law The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the performance pages must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which can jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The Performance Pages include the following features e 0 60 mph 0 100 km h e Braking Distance NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 e 1 8 Mile e 1 4 Mile e Instantaneous G Force e Peak G Force e Digital Speedometer To access press and release the MENU button until Performance Pages displays in the EVIC Press the SCROLL button to cycle through
75. provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e The clicking sound of solenoid valves e Brake pedal pulsations and e Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 WARNING WARNING Continued e The Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisti e The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent cated electronic equipment that may be suscep tible to interference caused by improperly in stalled or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals Pumping of the anti lock brakes
76. road conditions The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Program ESP This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESP corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position 8 The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as
77. screen will display radio and media mode information depending on which radio is in the vehicle Refer to Remote Sound System Controls 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime RKE Battery Low with a single chime Memory 1 2 Profile Set Memory 1 2 Profile Recall e Memory System Disabled Vehicle Not In PARK with a single chime Memory System Disabled Seat Belt Buckled with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in PARK Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km h Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km h Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Trunk Ajar with a single chime Low Washer Fluid with a single chime Oil Pressure Oil Change Required with single chime e ACC Off When the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system is turned off Refer to Adaptive Crui
78. seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 421 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 Replace the engine air cleaner filter L1 Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M
79. side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 ms about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SABIC airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle Front and Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Additional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and provide verification Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or unt
80. sources are Stereo Audio Surround and Video Surround When in Video Surround mode balance and fade are set automatically by the KMS1 system to provide the ultimate surround sound experience REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o clock positions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 The VOLUME button controls the sound level of the sound system Press the top of the VOLUME button to increase the sound level VOLUME Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to Button decrease the sound level Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the J Compass Temp Audio screen This screen displays radio and media mode information AUDIO depending on which radio is in the vehicle MODE 045105297 Button Remote Sound System Controls Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The EVIC features a driver interactive display which is located in the instrument cluster If the Compass Temp Audio screen is already displayed when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed then the mode will change i e from AM to FM to Media mode etc depending on which radio is in the vehicle 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se When the EVIC is in the Compass Temp Audio screen press the FUNCTION SELECT button to operate various ra
81. system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 23 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first placed in the RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
82. the vr button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Command system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Command e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period e Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the en
83. the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belts The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch ing latch plates or Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasion ally and pull it tight if necessary The seat belt must be in the Au
84. the degree of brake application UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 13 Electronic Stability Program ESP Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion ease up on the accelerator and apply as Le little throttle as possible Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program ESP 14 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se CAUTION WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads 240 F 116 C or greater pull over and stop the vehicle Idle vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself refer to Maintaining Your Vehicle and follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
85. tires High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in maximum capacity at continuous speeds above the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your 75 mph 120 km h authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck STARTING AND OPERATING 321 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 5 055007576 Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires 1 Worn Tire to help you in determining when your tires should be 2 New le replaced These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators t
86. to Defrost Floor amp or pie Defrost as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort 54352266 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS ll Starting Procedures O Automatic Transmission O Keyless Go H Normal Starting O Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or Do ER RE FEE ee EN O If Engine Fails To Start AARG Marie i 3 tyes HER senna eee es Mi Engine Block Heater If Equipped 275 W Automatic Transmission 280 275 O General Information 276 O Key Ignition Park Interlock 277 O Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 283 o Brake Transmission Interlock Manual 278 OVAC soes EER REDES E yea 284 278 O Five Speed Automatic Transmission 285 280 sie cuc wm 285 280 Mite iek uaa cada REPE HARE ER ER 289 2 2 STARTING AND OPERATING ee El OPE UO 3553993 49 99S PEE SWAT 289 O General Information 4 69 Ee me 24 we eo ea AU 290 Bl Driving On Slippery Surfaces 290 He eeelei UD 4a dye sc agesn A HR ER en oye dos 290 mi ene siewe xav ee EE NS ee DES AA IR 2 291 N Driving Through Water 291 a Flowing Risitie Water i s ass sae wo 291 O Shallow Standing Water 292 NM Power Steering caede yi De RE ex xo es 293 O Power Steering Fluid Check 294 W Parking Brake s sie ED ARE RE N Ee 295 M DOES oud IS HE EE FEES 297 O Anti Lock Brake System oe ae ER ER RE 298 N Electronic Brake Control System
87. to SOOS d SmartBeam in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument panel press and hold the button until the setting is correct 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 RER REN RBZ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN RER and RBZ radios contain a CD DVD player USB port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia REN RER or RBZ user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Command in Understand ing The Features Of Your Vehicle Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio To Manually Set the Clock 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour wit
88. to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connec tion can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Voice Tree Main Menu Recent Towing gency English p Uconnect Francais Last See Enter Enter Number See Setup Read Send Phonebook Name Number on Phone Flowchart Messages Messages Flowchart is redialed The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030607515 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Phonebook Bhensbogk Enter Name Enter Name Entries Listed PNR Enter Name 1st Confirmation at a time Enter Location Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Current Number Enter Number is played Enter New New Entry Added Nurber Entry is modified Entry Deleted Phonebook Cleared Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Announcement Co
89. trunk be kept clear and open e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner e If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Proced
90. used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind t
91. would be beneficial you if you have not adjusted your driving speeds and stopping in or to account for the lack of the feature may be in acci dent 11 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for six to eight seconds 9 as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first PN placed in the RUN position If the light is either not on during starting or stays on or turns on 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee while driving then have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 12 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which
92. 0 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will WARNING decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle causes pressure to build u
93. 03 Installing and Removing the ENGINE START STOP Button Installing the Button 1 Remove the key fob from the ignition switch 2 Insert the ENGINE START STOP button into the ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable 3 Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into position Removing the Button 1 The ENGINE START STOP button can be removed from the ignition switch for key fob use 2 Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the chrome bezel at the 6 o clock position and gently pry the button loose ee STARTING AND OPERATING 277 NOTE The ENGINE START STOP button should only be removed or inserted with the ignition in the LOCK position OFF position for Keyless Go Normal Starting Using the ENGINE START STOP Button NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal To start the engine the transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL Press and hold the brake pedal while press ing the ENGINE START STOP button once The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting press the button again To Turn Off the Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button 1 Place the shift lever in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button 2 The ignit
94. 1 mph 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is tapped speed decreases To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control on Hills NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The automatic transmission will downshift while climb ing uphill or descending downhill This downshift is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system is a driver aid that senses for obstacles behind the vehicle Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations ParkSense is active when the driver shifts the transmis sion into the REVERSE position and the parking brake is not applied and the vehicle speed is less than 10 mp
95. 2 aha eee Gee eo Fob ase ewe eee De 128 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 195 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 383 413 Selection OF Oil iss oe on koh DOE CC N 371 Sentry Key Immobilizer 3 exo oh RUE 15 Sentry Key Programming ase spe DoE KAR Se De 17 Sentry Key Replacement 262 032 HS 16 Service Assistance 0 EE SE SS SS Se 435 Service CONIC osse see Ie Hu RAD VET 437 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator ES SS 198 Service Manuals lees 439 Setting the Clock x ues bees Ya 221 222 224 227 236 series Personal Gein op RE ER ER Ed Ee 216 OWING 6 aoe EERS PARA ans ERROR RS es 280 Automatic Transmission 280 285 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 49 Shoulder Belts a lt 4440664 ORC ER be OR RES 44 Side View Mirror Adjustment 91 DIenals TUE castor ese rsi yesir DES 83 145 189 Slippery Surfaces Driving On uuo s sodes 290 SIDarIDBaflS usage E Hb ce endows ee d 143 SHOW LeS ug scende bed ead UD e ob ees 323 Sound System Anl c S es tee eae ER ewe eee ee ees 257 PAKTU so aa SEL ERER es 413 Specifications Fuel Gasoline a wawa REDE EER ee ers 413 ae Tr 413 Speed Control Cruise Control asa sede aq es we x 155 wei C Hake DR ne GR AE 189 Ede RS RE EE OE EES 24 275 Automatic Transmission LL 275 Cold Weather SE 000 eee eee ee 278 Engine Fails to Start uus qua KERE EER RIES 278 uns APA AE IE OE
96. 34 5 bes eens os 979 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M El Cool sie 234944394 5 1 2 ES ES 382 Eb ele D rc 387 O Automatic Transmission 390 Dean ide ss Ee TT 991 D Appearance Care And Protection From COMOSION sir 92 82 93 6206 ARES KE SES 392 aM d EE OE OE ON SW PS 398 O Integrated Power Module O Rear Power Distribution Center 400 W Vehicle Storage 00 405 l Replacement Bulbs 406 B Bulb Replacement 4 407 O Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp And Park Turn Lamp 407 o Tail Stop Tail Turn Signal Lamp And Backup Lat ooo eai pedo oe 8 griegos 407 Elise Lanp aces acr Fur Pew POT EAT IOS 410 W Fluid Capacities Sescuducee6ne d ced vest 412 Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 413 BEE 26224640 OAR GERRIE ER 413 sa M ICT gos toe at eae es 414 es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 6 1L G9 O 9 9 s Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 6 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 2 Integrated Power Module 7 Air Cleaner Filter 3 Coolant Pressure Cap 8 Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 9 Engine Oil Dipstick 5 Engine Coolant Reservoir 10 Washer Fluid Reservoir 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors th
97. 440408 E DADE ss 122 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie lBl Voice Command If Equipped 122 H Voice Command System Operation 122 ERCOmbiaBdS ione am Rode RR dos 124 EL VOICe MIE vee edie hee ORE SOR EH a 127 ic METTI 127 EL POWER els CC 128 LU Power Recliniig seats ss nurse ae 129 a bumbar UPPOO esesta srra ran E 130 O Head Restraint ss cennad RE 130 O Heated Seals scu eue LEERDERS RES ER 132 O Folding Rear Seal sys as EER oh S bh 134 W Driver Memory Seat If Equipped 135 O Programming The Memory Feature 136 O Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory i 42024 137 o Memory Position Recall 138 O Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With Memory Seat OBI sae outs SR orreee 138 W To Open And Close The Hood 140 beo PC rmm 141 E Headlight SWC is oops SR RE CR HAS 141 O Automatic Headlights s eua dee EER A OR 142 o Headlights On With Wipers 142 oO Smartbeam If Equipped 143 O Headlight Time Delay sso ese Rn 144 B Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 144 ALe SON Reminder 313 4 29 soa oe c pae 144 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 EPOR Hole oi bu Ghee pane ee LAE HE ME EE 145 E Rain Sensing Wipers x awake RE Uem 150 oO Multifunction Lever a ua ce eec tomm rm e gs 145 W Power Tilt Telescoping Steering Column EL T r SIGNS se oe each eae eee RR 145 Ms EI
98. ACT 4 uos mes sie unde se ee sees 437 Mi Warranty Information 438 E MOPAR Parts o4 ccc0hedvuus ed sabe ea ee 438 W Reporting Safety Defects 438 O In The 50 United States And Washington BEAT OM oer ee eee es ee ee O In Canada 434 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie W Publication Order Forms 439 O Traction Grades ws REDE emp e tus TT RSS 441 lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire O Temperate Grades sr ocior PR Pm orc S 442 Quality Grades sys EES AR ed P EROR RE E OE 441 O Tread weal 22 92924a4 G X acre N HA 441 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 435 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At m
99. ARNINGS displays in the EVIC Then press the SCROLL button to display anyone of the following choices e Oil Temperature Shows the actual oil temperature e Oil Pressure Shows the actual oil pressure e Tire Pressure Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire EXCLUDING THE SPARE TIRE Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol Deutsch Italiano or Francais Then as you continue the information will display in the selected language NOTE The EVIC will not change the Uconnect lan guage selection Refer to the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h When ON is selected all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit When
100. Air Recirculation Control A C Operation Full Automatic Operation Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to either Hi or Lo Auto Set mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Hi or Lo Auto Set mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set blower knob to either Hi or Lo Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Automatic User selectable to any speed Automatic Automatic Automatic User selectable to any air delivery point Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can bc overridden for 10 minutes at a time Automatic but can be overridden for 10 minutes al a lime User selectable outside or recirculated Automatic Automatic User selectable A C on or off Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Hi or Lo Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort User selectable to any speed User selectable to any air delivery point Automatic User selectable outside or recirculated User selectable A C on or off 81341de7 The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the mode control knob on the right
101. Brake Warning Light is not on If the Anti Lock Brake Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the Anti Lock Brake Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the Anti Lock Brake Light remain on the ABS and EBD systems are not functioning Immediate repair to the ABS system is required ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system commonly referred to as ESP This system includes the Anti Lock Brake System ABS the Traction Control System TCS the Brake Assist System BAS and the Electronic Stability Program ESP These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau lic brake pressure This prevents wheel lock up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions Th
102. C position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Continued 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See CAUTION Continued e Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism e RES is asingle CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded e Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the
103. CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND butt
104. CLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the Vehicle Certification Label This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose contro
105. D oll in oa E Yellow No 2nd LED 453in llibcm Yellow No Sd LED 3L5in 80cm 393in I0cm Yellow No AthLED 255in cm 335in 85cm Yellow No BhLED 20in 60cm 276in 0cm Yellow No atk ted ier wen 197 in 0 em Red OE Rees HBin cm Red Yes Continuous ParkSense System Usage e Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could NOTE affect the performance of the ParkSense Rear Park l Assist system e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow ice mud nube a e dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system operating properly e When you turn ParkSense off the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST DISABLED Further more once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST DISABLED mes sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE ParkSense when on will MUTE the radio when it is sounding a tone If a ParkSense system malfunction occurs a single chime will sound once per ignition cycle In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM and the LED in the ParkSense switch will illuminate If this occurs after making sure the rear fas
106. E ee Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTI
107. E ee eh ey eee eens 83 317 441 Aging Lile OF Tires as a4 ama dosi HR RR DR get 322 Air Pressure 224 2239 23 bh eee PRESS ES 317 General Information 004 317 OE eed 3445423 ee EES DS 319 Inflation Pressures llle 318 N INDEX 461 Lile OF Times eus be is OR oe BO tenet one ce eee 322 Load CAPAC sperren HR nee ee tems 313 314 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 326 Pressure Waring Light i o uobis mm n 9 196 Quality Grading uo a sues 244 Site i dee webs 441 nir RE EE EE ET OE RE a nese 320 KReplaceilent 4465 604 4en Soe phen ces 2 oes 322 ROOD PPP chaneaganegeees 324 c A rr 307 317 252 mm 309 DON diie 464 ou V ordo ER onde ce ee P Hd 329 xenon 320 Tread Wear Indicators ss ss sce DE Ee RARR 321 JO Oper 00d sis egiara 14 p eee aes es 140 TOWING PT Gaeta dew hee eee M 342 24 Hour Towing Assistance 108 Behind d Motor Home uada pex Ree RE sed 342 Disabled hide 2 use eee ERA EP UEM 360 ReqeaOnal ne irrar Renin PEER 342 TOWING Assistance 44 cose gt ER E 3C RE AERA RE RE 108 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home 342 Ira ODE ODDEOT cerrar yes idro berg rcr did es 301 Traller TOWING sae bees EERS de Rondo her 342 Trans niie IG sai eek eie ten ae hae da 390 Automatic 422 e TREES 280 285 390 DUCI SEE STE e SPESE RN PEE 414 MUU 46 e 6354 AE EE Gs EER ET ON 280 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry seep de sed Vee Bede 26 Transmitter Garage Door
108. EFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch and Keyless Go Start Stop button for unauthorized opera tion If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will prevent the vehicle from starting and provide the following audible and visible signals the horn will pulse the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the instru ment cluster will flash Rearming of the System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off after three minutes turn all of the visual signals off after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm the System Vehicles Not Equipped with Keyless Go Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press a power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger door is open or pre
109. ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking s
110. ESP is unavailable In an emer gency evasive maneuver the ESP system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off ESP mode is intended for off highway or off road only Synchronizing ESP The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is combined with BAS indicator If the power supply is interrupted battery disconnected or discharged the ESP BAS Malfunction Indi cator Light may illuminate with the engine running If this should occur turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right The ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light should go out However if the light remains on have the ESP and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running The system will turn the ESP BAS Malfunction Indica tor Light on continuously while the engine is running if it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or both If the light remains on after several ignition cycles and you have driven the vehicle several miles kilome ters at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h and the ESP is synchronized refer to
111. EVIC Refer to Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS under Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel DSS modes for audio sources are Stereo and Audio Surround which is surround sound equalized for the front seat occupants The Video Surround mode is described unde rDriver Selectable Surround DSS The Video Surround Mode will only be available for video 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M media sources DVDs Video CDs or other video media supported by the radio Some audio will sound better in DSS modes others in Stereo mode When in Audio Surround mode balance is set auto matically Fader control is available to add more sur round audio if desired VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM VES IF EQUIPPED The optional Video Entertainment System VES in cludes the following components for rear seat entertain ment e Adiagonal 7 in 17 8 cm Liquid Crystal Display LCD screen integrated into the center console armrest The screen features brightness control for optimum day time and nighttime viewing 8199815e Opening the Rear Seat VES e The LCD screen swings up from the rear of the armrest to allow the rear seat passenger s to view the display NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 pom e A battery powered infrared remote control snaps into a molded compartment in the center console armrest upper storage
112. ICLE M ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS The 12 Volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray has There are two 12 Volt 13 Amp electrical power outlets power available only when the ignition is placed in the on this vehicle Both of the power outlets are protected by ACC or RUN position SST R a fuse Insert cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power outlets for use to ensure proper operation NOTE e To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Front Power Outlet NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 WARNING Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console on vehicle s not equipped with the ash receiver tray A fire leading to bodily injury could result The center console outlet is powered directly from the battery power available at all times Items plugged into this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent the engine from starting Center Console Power Outlet WARNING To avoid serious injury or death e Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Continued 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued CAUTION Continued e Do not touch with wet hands e Accessories that
113. ING YOUR VEHICLE 405 VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take these steps to protect your battery e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx Id REPLACEMENT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Rear Courtesy Reading Lamps WsW Rear Compartment Trunk Lamp 562 Overhead Console Reading Lamps 578 Visor Vanity ape s vau dq des a a e eee A6220 Glove Box Lamp If Equipped 194 Door COMICS hu crest reman puea PEER MEE Ke 562 Shift Indicator Lamp sis PERE Rn JKLE14140 Optional Door Map Pocket Cupholder LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb Number Low Beam Headlamp High Intensity Discharge HID 6 tee pane ii DIS Serviced at Authorized Dealer High Beam Headlamp
114. INGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHIC
115. ITON au a one Cee a LOER eee CaS 93 ro C 197 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 189 Loading Vehicle o cosa tot d RS RASSE S 340 341 Capacities soene os Re HA ER OR T 341 ES RI ROES IE EE 9 2 35 313 LOCKS ARE AAR FASE EREE ER ON ONE 27 Auto Bill da AAN hoe OTI TIE 30 Automatic Door s 93 a 6S E ERO EM ICE RE AE 29 Child Protection 333 953 6846564654566 3 34 IJOOP ske Eie eee ees eee RET 27 ower DOOL sei d AR Su RS PEE ES 28 Low Tine Pressure System x ese 62 452 Rb AR RD 326 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LAICH RE SS EFE eee anes 73 74 D bmncalol Body eins qus ors qoi ER AAR REDE 377 Lambar Support 22321 3 hn oH tete epu dope f 130 Maintenance Free Battery iis asse eR ni bes 373 Maintenance General cess 369 Maintenance Procedures less 369 Maintenance Schedule 416 Maintenance Sunroof eee 173 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 198 367 Manual Service 1 2 dme kk ues ima cR REX 439 Manual Transmission sss 991 Fluid Level Check llslns 392 Map Reading Lights xs eden Ete 146 164 Master Cylinder Brakes sse 924 ES RR ES 388 Memory Feature Memory Seat 195 N INDEX 455 Meters ed 2399 bene ER EP one SORA een ss 135 Memory Seats and Radio ies 045 135 Methanol sorse cesarean care ee were eee ees 334 Mini lip Computer lt lt 4 sede beter od a hace 206 NUTO xax 3 SOEK OE USE REA 90 Z
116. KERE ee 385 Radiator CAP 24 45 465 a eee FUSER RSS RES 385 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 383 412 413 Corrosion Protection 00 00 ee eee 992 Cruise Control Speed Control 155 Cruise Lig Pr seen pbs oes KERE DE 189 CCUDBOIHGIS x cessa dee HD QN Peas ees 177 297 Customer ASSISTANCE 2 ee eae nda con N ne ede RA 435 Customer Programmable Features 216 Daytime Brightness Interior Lights 148 Daytime Running Lights 5 555245 DER OE 144 Dealer CIVICS cite soe mugs des UP E SE A 368 Deck Lid Emergency Release a seed ses spes 42 Deck Lid Power Release 40 Defroster Rear Window 181 Defroster Windshield 81 267 Delay Intermittent Wipers 149 Diagnostic System Onboard zo x ib hum 366 Dimmer Switch Headlight 146 Dipsticks Oil Engine Power Steering 448 INDEX NEE Id Disabled Vehicle Towing Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant Engine Oil Door Locks Door Locks Automatic Door Opener Garage Driving On Slippery Surfaces Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water DVD Player Video Entertainment System Electric Rear Window Defrost Electric Remote Mirrors Electrical Power Outlets Electronic Brake Control System Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control Electronic Stability Program ESP Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 195 Electronic Vehicle Inf
117. LE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up Keyless Go Feature This vehicle may be equipped with the Keyless Go feature refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three with detents and one that is spring loaded The detent posi tions are OFF ACC and RUN The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When re leased from the START position the switch automatically returns to the RUN position NOTE With Keyless Go the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC will display the ignition switch position OFF ACC RUN Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information De ADDR Ge MR N Re N Ga Juu u m eua ee RO RR ROME eC ee MR RR MR RR REA Wireless Ignition Node WIN 2 ACC ACCESSORY 4 START LOCK 3 RUN N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency k
118. LE ie ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should WARNING be belted at all times e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or Lap Shoulder Belts outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with these areas are more likely to be seriously injured lap shoulder belts or killed o Do not allow people to ride in any area of your The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the belts shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and normal conditions However in a collision the belt will using a seat belt properly lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision best Continued N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING Continued e Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas
119. Locks in this section for more information on trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat stroke 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Trunk Emergency Release The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency release handle It is located on the inside of the trunk lid near the latch and is coated so that it glows in a darkened trunk Pull on the handle to open the trunk Trunk Emergency Release OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen ger Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window if equipped An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event if equipped N TH
120. Monitor under Starting And Operating N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 Right Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pressure and Tire Pressure Monitor under Starting And Operating Right Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pressure and Tire Pressure Monitor under Starting And Operating Check TPM System with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pressure and Tire Pressure Monitor under Starting And Operating Check Gascap refer to Adding Fuel in Starting And Operating Service Park Assist System with a single chime Turn To Run refer to Remote Starting System in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle Upshift 0 60 mph 0 100 km h if equipped with Performance Pages Braking Distance if equipped with Performance Pages 1 8 Mile if equipped with Performance Pages 1 4 Mile if equipped with Performance Pages Instantaneous G Force if equipped with Performance Pages Peak G Force if equipped with Performance Pages Digital Speedometer if equipped with Performance Pages 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Engine Oil Change Indicator System Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec onds
121. NDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE m Power Seats The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat WARNING near the floor Use this switch to move the driver s seat Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is up or down forward or rearward or to recline the dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could seatback The passenger s seat will move up or down cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be forward or rearward properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust m cT theseat only while the vehicle is parked CAUTION DO NOT place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Power Seat Switch EE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Power Reclining Seats f The recliner control is located on the outboard side of the WARNING seat Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Power Seat Recline Switch 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Lumbar Support Head Restraints This feature allows you to increase or decrease the Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event amount
122. NG THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ADJUSTABLE PEDALS The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedal to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering Wheel The switch is located on the front side of the driver s seat cushion side shield Adjustable Pedals Switch Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward toward the front of the vehicle Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward toward the driver e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e The pedals can be adjusted while driving WARNING e The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control is on One of the following messages will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if a pedal adjustment is attempted when the system is locked out Adjustable Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged or Adjusta
123. NG YOUR VEHICLE 81 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M
124. NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occu pants or others 25 Oil Pressure Warning Light vi This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut OFF the engine as soon as possible A single chime will sound when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked using the procedure shown in Maintaining Your Vehicle ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 040905974 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following e System status Vehicle information warning message displays Tire Pressure Monitor Syst
125. NTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPARS parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your
126. ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen ger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry and the EVIC is programmed to Unlock All Doors 1st Press all doors will unlock no matter which handle is grasped If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if Driver Door 1st Press is programmed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening You have to touch a passenger handle to unlock all doors passively when Driver s Door Only is programmed in the EVIC Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock If Equipped When ON is selected you can use your RKE transmitter t
127. OUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M conditioning An indicator in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected NOTE To control the air conditioning manually the mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position e Recirculation Control This button can be used to block out smoke odors dust high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired The Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily An indicator in the button illuminates when the Recirculation mode is active You may use this feature separately NOTE Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibil ity For this reason the system will not allow recirculation to be selected while in Defrost or Defrost Floor mode Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the indicator in the control button to blink and then turn off Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50
128. Opener Homel ink 164 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Bitty eta ss stasis na ge ss 20 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 ds po Pets arasaatana HA gode ed oes Tread Wear Indicators ccs dee RES bens Trip OGOMeter a 3 39 4 20904 435 545 PX ESE he Gas Trunk Lid Deck Lid is EER EER REESE ES Trunk Release Emergency 462 INDEX NEE Id Trunk Release Remote Control 40 TU aoi oor RR ARE 145 189 UCT Connector exse kee be bees Re dx WA 247 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 93 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 441 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 247 Universal Transmitter 0004 164 Unleaded Gasoline 25442468 daw Y xe d oes 99D Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 49 Vay MATTOS dak oe tad he eae eG RE 93 Variance COMPASS s icu cea tees et vee ee EE RS 214 Vehicle Certification Label 340 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading 4 24 2x A eS e h e405 314 340 341 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Velde LONG ee m 269 405 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 17 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System 4444465215402 KS 04 258 Vises ENO ME Cll panes NARE ere r es 371 Voice Recognition System VR 122 Warning Flasher Hazard 344 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 189 Varpnimes and
129. REA FEATURES stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Trunk Mat If Equipped The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the A reversible trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down area The rubber side of the mat is used to protect the position should not be used as a play area by interior of the trunk from mud snow and debris It children when the vehicle is in motion They could provides a nonskid surface to keep cargo from sliding be seriously injured in an accident Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts Continued UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 REAR WINDOW FEATURES CAUTION Continued Rear Window Defroster e Use care when washing the inside of the rear The rear window defroster button is located on the window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on climate control Press this button to turn on the the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to when the rear window defroster is on The rear window after soaking with warm water defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of opera
130. RES and REQ REL RET radios only with uconnect For sales code RER RBZ REN REP REW RB2 or REZ touch screen radio UCI feature refer to the separate RER REN RBZ RB2 or REZ User s Manual UCI is available only if equipped as an option with these radios This feature allows an iPod to be plugged into the vehicle s sound system through a 16 pin connector using the provided interface cable UCI supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the UCI features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e f the radio has a USB port connecting an iPod to this port does not play the media For playing an iPod use the separate 16 pin connector port in the glove compartment on some vehicles 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Connecting an iPod to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the UCI feature to control the connected device Connecting The iPod Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s 16 pin connector port which is located in the glove compartment on some vehicles Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s UCI system iPod may take a few seconds to connect the iPod starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE e It may be necessary to remove the connector pin protect
131. RS 372 Onboard Diagnostic System se ide AR xs 366 367 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 164 Operating Precautions si 3 voca sine 9 hs 366 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors 04 91 Overhead Console 6 44444 voee danse ne san aes 163 Overiecaliie ER ING o2 wee vss Xue e Foe ee Ss 344 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 439 Pani Coane CPC 392 Panno Jti ses kde n en foe eee see RE sos 22 Park Sense System Rear is sy ad Sk e E EN 158 Forking Broke 2 i is deg n cene do a dne ROS 9 RE sa 295 Poso DIOE issu ea ERR ERES SER RC E WR 146 Passend sis ey dae tees ee CER PIRE OE i 92 Pedals Adjustable x xa 95s KERR ER AR EE 159 Personal Sells css t7 ERE F2 bd EED ED 216 Pe 4 eee ee eee AE EE eee VAS RE eee 78 Phone Cellular 4443566665864 ERROR EE bee RS 93 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 93 Placard Tire and Loading Information 912 Power El AE OR ERREUR ER FEE MES 297 D ck Lid Release 2 222145 2 eh eue ewes RES 40 Distribution Center Fuses 400 Door LOCKS soes s dre SAD E dg equ ue 28 Mro oase Aknee War n Mi Hd Oe Ed OR N J2 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 174 13 A ee ee er ea ee 128 DIGGS 4425 asc 293 294 KOOL sus 6464 Hie eee EX ee ER p HEER 171 Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 152 VIG OWS EE obec EE bch ese ei deed ae hd 37 lowersSieenne Pd 2545546055 PERE ES eS 414 Pregnant Women and
132. Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your Uconnect Phone The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which cellular 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the Uconnect Phone will use the priority three cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section Dial by Saying a Number Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt an
133. S NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEE TIREFIT Usage Precautions Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 prior to the expiration date printed on the bottle label to assure optimum operation of the sys tem Refer to Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT section F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement The Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 is a one tire application use After each use always immediately replace these components at an authorized dealer When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form clean water and a damp cloth will remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel components Once the sealant dries it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded For optimum performance make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the TIREFIT kit e You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle tires The kit also comes with two needles located in the Accessory Storage Compartment located on the bottom of the air pump for inflating sport balls rafts or like inflatable items However use only the Air Pump Hose 7 and make sure the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them The TIREFIT Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than Va 6mm diameter in the tread of your vehicle e Do not lift or carry TIREFIT kit by hoses WARNING e Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle cl
134. S ETE ES 24 Starine and Operas adecet EE dx bh ERROR RE 275 Starting Procedures 460 INDEX NEE Id Steering Column CONTOIS usus does SR ora HE DRS 145 DON 224 uas RES ELE RR RS ADA Ha 293 294 TE Cold edere ska BERE ORE OE KO OE E 152 Wheel TIE 2231 3 95 Rueda ucbu ccu Eur Sce 152 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound Dyustem Con s eus se eeu seen OER DS REUS 260 vc PCT 178 405 DIOIdS S VENICE is asses ERA VER EEU 269 405 SONNE VOUE VENICE aa ER RE AR KERE ERG N goles 405 xi Wisi PDT 359 DUN ROOF ses gy kukr oe hee RAE oe EN 171 SUN asses LORI uu doo uc hea as Rok Bo DRR ea N 164 Sunroof Maintenance ua 5 3 902 EER CE ge 179 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 53 Sy MRMCUC Eng me OM aos aka una dotem ded dede RD OR 371 Dystem Remote Sarie s apu sgo eed OS 43 OS 24 Tac DOMCE 12 2069 69 De HR ob bee des e ORES eS 190 Telescoping Steering Column 152 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 263 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 193 194 345 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 73 Theft Alarm Security Alarm a 2d od xa es 17 Theft System Security Alarm 2 2 re 17 dit teer COMM ea 0929 3 453 9 OUD RR sa oe 152 Time Delay leaden ues smato RR RE RS 144 Tire and Loading Information Placard 919 Tire Identification Number TIN 311 Tire MKD 4 bane ties oh EE ETE 307 Tire Safety Information s sss sira aa ek simaa 307 UREI oe eee oe N hee En RUNE pe EE 345 Wes saga AR
135. Speed Control lever toward you CANCEL Pushing and releasing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition OFF erases the set speed from memory NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 To Resume Speed If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h you can resume the previous set speed To do so push the lever upward to RESUME ACCEL and release Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal To Vary the Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME ACCEL lever If the lever is continually held in the RESUME ACCEL position the set speed will continue to increase until the lever is released then the new set speed will be established Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h etc To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is set push down and hold the lever in SET DECEL If the lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position the set speed will continue to until the lever is released Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and a new set speed will be established Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to SET DE CEL once will result in a
136. TE dup Ee E Eee ORES 386 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 298 301 Anti Lock Warning Light 22 2 e 190 300 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 AnG Then stem 44454 4253 9 dri Ha op RE 195 oe ie C MIB 4 aca aon Fe oe odes eho RR ee 392 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 17 Petisie MOWING aci esu 29 ud ieg draco wea AE dd 108 Auto Down Power Windows 38 Auto Unlock Doors eere 30 Auto Up Power WIndows s2e99x R39 9 9 3 38 Automatic Dimming Mitror ses sewe RR ars 90 N INDEX 445 Automatic Door Locks 00 29 30 Agtomauc Headlights 24546448144 sentences 142 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 263 Automatic Transaxle Special AddIUVES s quiu xe exui da n bor xa E 391 Automatic Transmission 285 390 391 OCIS TING ss ance te waren Ra e OR 391 414 Autostick SAAT OAR eae tins tetera ees 289 Paid and Filter Changes essem e ee eD 3 ves 391 Eu Change suene ei Rd e dosi ciere pores 391 Fluid Level Check i422 sew omes 390 FIC pe m 414 sun c A ep ee eee eo 285 Special Additives 44 239 2229 83 3 9 eee ee See 991 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode 288 Autostick sods peerage I A HERE xd d ES 289 Axle IDIOMS TETTE ER EE OR TITOLI 414 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 414 Daley ii censeuone ae eee REERTIAL ERI ES PER 373 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 23 LOGAHON AA OR OE OE OR OR ee 373 Belts Seat xeu ud oe
137. TIREFIT Usage Precautions wd duet 348 ie um l D Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle O Sealing a Tire With TIREFIT i s soo oe s 350 With A Tow Dolly 362 B Jump Starting Procedures 355 O Preparations For Jump Start 4 sr Rs 356 344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the center of the instrument panel between the center air outlets Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345 CAUTION to h
138. The climate control system filters outside air containing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 for filter replacement instructions 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS i and turn on A C Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise VERY HOT oet the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle A set the Mode control to Recirculate with A C on and roll up the windows Sx Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level pilo with A C on If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel and turn on A C If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control to Bi Level with A C on Adjust Temperature control for comfort COOL OR COLD Set the Mode control to Defrost Floor or Defrost Sg HUMID CONDITIONS Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and so 4 64 Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear 6 646 pil COLD DRY Set the Mode control to Floor d If it s sunny you may want more upper air CONDITIONS i In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level s In very cold weather if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control
139. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of RE VERSE The Tilt Mirror in Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Power Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the driver s door trim panel next to the power door lock switch A rotary knob selects the left mirror right mirror or off position ant Power Mirror Control After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move Use the center off position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the MEMORY switch on the driver side door trim panel to return the power mirrors to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle for further information Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle for further information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors An illuminated vanity mirror is l
140. This light will turn on when the electronic O speed control or Adaptive Cruise Control 2 Low Fuel Indicator Light ACC is ON This light will turn on and a single chime will sound when the fuel level drops to approximately 1 8 tank 3 Front Fog Light Indicator O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 4 Turn Signal Indicators Ca The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 NOTE e A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on e Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate 5 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 6 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record
141. Xutomabc DIS aa qc kdo dae oa 90 Electric Powered agence dooie ewe dr 92 Electric Remote 1 42542 4 44 44 0445 449 X ed 92 Editor ole usce oe tears I eed a eae qt 21 Heated oi aa Ka BS oa RAS Ge Pe RS E 93 eco oa ooie DE eos Ga ee ome nes 91 VU wu aapa es Peas ee Se ees ee ee amp 93 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System 2233522295 xn 326 Mopar PariS 424444 908 9 0 PER RAD HERE 368 438 MTBE ETBE 434 BEAR RA Uie eds 334 Multi Function Control Lever 145 New Vehicle Break In Period 78 Occupant Restraints ss eed e wes d Rs 42 60 64 Occupant Restraints Sedan 56 60 62 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 333 413 eouc ROES EE N es Cee bn bes 194 jo RR EET OER oan eee eee eens 194 Oil Chance Indicator a acu oe oras o e oes 206 Oil Change Indicator Reset a a cse sondere EER 206 Oil EE DG ax eee he eh oa tA a Ade d oS 370 413 Cape eei veu ed ASMA TRAE weve ES 412 Change terval s apearen aeri a eane anes 370 Wiss A Pr EES ES 370 Di C Ha 370 bool rn 3 2 Faller sis 295225 Ve errer 372 413 Filter Disposal naecmed Ge Gee naga a aoe ee 3 2 Materials Added to 0 00 4 371 Recommendation 000 371 412 DUBUDEDE S Luce PPS ea wee oh ee HER RS E 371 VICOS aas EE BE AR Hee bee EE oS 371 412 456 INDEX NEE id Ode EES Eie ah ee eee ou te oes Fe RS 372 Oil Filter Selection as ocho bo RES PE
142. Your Vehicle if equipped e ACC Blinded If the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system deactivates due to performance limiting con ditions Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped ACC Unavailable If the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system turns off due to a temporary malfunc tion that limits functionality Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle if equipped Service ACC If the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system turns off due to an internal system fault that requires service from an authorized dealer Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped Adjustable Pedals Disabled Cruise Engaged with a single chime only available on vehicles equipped with memory seats 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Adjustable Pedals Disabled Vehicle In REVERSE with a single chime only available on vehicles equipped with memory seats Channel Transmit Channel Training Channel Trained Clearing Channels Channels Cleared Did Not Train Left Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pressure and Tire Pressure Monitor under Starting And Operating Left Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pressure and Tire Pressure
143. a Satellite Mode 254 D Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone lt EUNDO a secare sare ROER sab ees 256 ll Kicker High Performance Sound System With Driver Selectable Surround DSS Jf Equipped 0 0 cece cece cece 257 ru ll Video Entertainment System VES li Equipped sr ans PERDE Ede Rd e B AE 258 D Kicker Mobile Surround KMS1 di Bodipped e DE 8 ER AE RS RR 260 ll Remote Sound System Controls POUND PCO siese esas HARE HER ES 260 B CD DVD Disc Maintenance 262 li Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 263 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Mi Climate Controls 0 263 EVO peiling TIPS esse E EDE ESE SKAAR sas 268 O Automatic Temperature Control 263 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 81817213 Air Outlet 7 Radio 13 Ignition Switch 2 Instrument Cluster 8 Climate Control 14 Hood Release 3 Hazard Switch 9 Heated Seat Switch 15 Trunk Release Button 4 Analog Clock 10 Power Outlet 16 Headlight Switch 5 Blectronic Stability Program Off Button 11 Ash Tray f Equipped 6 Glove Compartment 12 Storage Compartment 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 81cf473c INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Electronic Speed Control Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Indicator Light If Equipped
144. a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and CAUTION multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can
145. ability ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read sion components You could lose control and have ings an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle SNOW TIRES Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires capacity other than what was originally equipped during the winter Standard tires are of the all season type on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S index could result in tire overloading and failure designation on the tire sidewall You could lose control and have an accident Continued 324 STARTING AND OPERATING ee If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the
146. ack down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the passenger doors To disable the window controls press and release the window lockout button setting it in the DOWN position To enable the window controls press and release the window lockout button again setting it in the UP position Window Lockout Switch 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Reset Anytime the vehicle battery is disconnected or goes dead the AUTO up function will be disabled To reactivate the AUTO up feature perform the following procedure after vehicle power is restored 1 Pull the window switch up to close window com pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Wind Buffeti
147. ading Lights At the forward end of the console are two courtesy reading lights Press the lens to turn on the light Press it a second time to turn off the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed when the Passive Entry door handle is used refer to Passive Entry in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa tion or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the overhead console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compartment access is a push push design Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open Push on the raised bar to close GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery The HomeLink buttons are located in the overhead console and contain one two or three dots lines desig nating the different HomeLink channels NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 TT MT ae WARNING e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people pets or other objects are i
148. ag system checked right away by an authorized dealer Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Differ ent airbag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to their full size The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The airbags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units If Equipped During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC airbags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the
149. ailure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Battery Location MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 81342982 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING WARNING Continued e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts ter
150. aintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve Call toll free at hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by ot eee en ee step troubleshooting and drivability procedures e 1 800 387 1143 Canada proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools Or and equipment Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com NN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 441 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use h
151. ake linings and replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter O C C C O L L L L L M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 429 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 126 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 Inspect the rear axle fluid Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts
152. aler as soon as possible Refer to F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement NOTE When having the tire serviced advise the autho rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the TIREFIT service kit N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 355 F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement 1 Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 2 Locate the rectangular Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed area where you place your fingers to unlatch the hoses 6 7 from their storage area 3 Use the yellow cap on end of the Sealant Hose 6 to depress the Sealant Bottle release button The Sealant Bottle 1 will pop up Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly 4 Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous ing 5 Position the new Sealant Bottle 1 to the housing so that the Sealant Hose 6 aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing and the alignment keys on the bottom of the bottle align with the alignment slots in the housing Then press the bottle into the housing An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked in place 6 Verify the yellow cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 and return the hose to its storage area located on the bottom of the air pump 7 Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the vehicle JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a batt
153. always be checked prior to operating the vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion Always adjust the head restraints when the vehicle is in PARK Front Heated Seat Switch After turning the ignition ON you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off Heated Seats This feature heats the front driver passenger and second row seats The controls for each heater are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Press the switch once to select High level heat ing Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off If High level heating is selected the system will auto matically switch to the Low level after 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of indi cators illuminated changes from two to one indicating the change Operation on the Low level setting also turns off automatically after 30 minutes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when u
154. an ae The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an e Instrument Panel impact that reguires airbag deployment The timing of the second stage determines whether the output force is low medium or high If a low output is sufficient to meet e Driver Advanced Front Airbag the need the remaining gas in the inflator is expended e Knee Impact Bolster e Passenger Advanced Front Airbag 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING WARNING Continued e No objects should be placed over or near the e Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster airbag on the instrument panel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC If Equipped SABIC airbags may offer side impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy down ward covering both windows on the impact side Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional The protective cove
155. ance message and the last variance Zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until the proper variance Zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the HOME button to exit Uconnect gps If Equipped Uconnect gps Display Control Press and release the MENU button until Navigation displays in the EVIC When the Navigation System is On the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the Map or Menu display on the Navigation Unit When the Menu display is active the SCROLL button can be used to scroll through the list the FUNCTION SELECT button can be used to select an item and the AUDIO MODE button can be used to return to the previous menu When the Map display is active pressing the FUNCTION SELECT but ton will change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu Turn by Turn Directions The EVIC displays turn by turn directions to a pro grammed destination when Turn by Turn Navigation is enabled through Personal Settings When enabled the EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the top of the screen followed by an arrow to indicate the direction to turn the vehicle and a count down to indicate the distance to the turn NOTE Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M System Warnings Customer Information Features Press and release the MENU button until SYSTEM W
156. ansmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during trunk entry Pressing the TRUNK button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the alarm will sound e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming sequences has oc curred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected The exterior lights will flash the horn will sound and the ignition will not start the vehicle If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Vehicles Equipped with Keyless Go Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle refer to Door Locks in Things To Know Before Starting for further information press the Keyless Go Start Stop button requires at lea
157. any authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 436 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e f for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identificati
158. any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the Voice Command vr button and say Help or Main Menu 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command EVR button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command vn button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main me
159. ases can injure or kill They contain CAUTION carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and e The catalytic converter requires the use of un odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Continued leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 CAUTION Continued e Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving gros
160. assembly coun 4 terclockwise to remove it from the tail lamp assembly Dr m 12c4b61 EERS RE Ry 7 Pull the tail lamp assembly clear from the vehicle to access the bulbs Turn bulb sockets counterclockwise to 1 Tail Stop Lamp Bulb remove 818dbiaf N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 2 Tail Lamp Bulb 3 Turn Signal Lamp Bulb 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Backup Lamp Bulb PUO en 9 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 10 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail lamp assembly and then turn it clockwise 11 Reinstall the tail lamp assembly fasteners electrical connector and trunk liner 12 Close the trunk License Lamp 1 Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear fascia N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 2 Remove the bulb and socket assembly 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and 5 Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia and then install install the replacement bulb the screws License Lamp Bulb 2 Socket 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FLUID CAPACITIES Metric O Fuel Approximate 12 xm Engine Oil with Filter 6 1 Liter Engine SAE 5W 40 API Certified Cooling System 6 1 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile 15 2 Quarts 14 4 Liters Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bott
161. atic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped The seat belts for both front seating positions may be equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension ers are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed airbag must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s or front passenger s if equipped with belt alert seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver or front passenger to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
162. authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed systems may void your warranty and could result in civil maintenance schedule there are other components which penalties being assessed against you may require servicing or replacement in the future WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could have the knowledge and the proper equipment If result in more costly repairs damage to other you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Continued The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continu
163. belt in a e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous collision Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt can t do its job properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any sla
164. bin 8199818b VES Video Screen NOTE Close the armrest after the LCD screen has been raised to its viewing position 81abfb61 VES Remote Control e The touch screen radio and DVD player controls allow front seat operation for easy setup in the case of younger rear seat passengers e Two wireless infrared headsets allow rear seat passen gers to listen to the same or individual audio sources 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Audio Video RCA Jacks AUX Jacks on the rear of the center console enable the monitor to display video directly from a video camera connect video games for display on the screen or play music directly from an MP3 player 1 Video in yellow 2 Left audio in white 3 Right audio in red NOTE Refer to your Vehicle Entertainment System VES Users Manual for detailed operating instruc tions NOTE Refer to the Uconnect Multimedia section of Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Kicker Mobile Surround KMS1 If Equipped The VES for this vehicle comes equipped with Kicker Mobile Surround KMS1 This feature offers the ulti mate movie experience by providing surround sound uniquely equalized for the interior space of your vehicle The KMS1 Video Surround mode activates whenever a video source is selected unless the system is already in Audio Surround mode DSS modes for video
165. bjects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued 318 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and unco
166. ble Pedal Disabled Vehicle In Reverse Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving You could lose control and have an accident Always adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the transmitter or the memory switch on the driver s door adjustable pedal s path trim panel to return the adjustable pedals to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle for further information NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged Electronic Speed Control takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control lever located on the right side of the steering wheel operates the system 81bc4c2c Electronic Speed Control Lever NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated simultaneously If this occurs the Electronic Speed Con trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicl
167. bove disables all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters 021307469 Key Fob with RKE Transmitter To Unlock the Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 If your vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Passive Entry System If Equipped under Door Locks for further information Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Set tings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter When this feature is turned on and the vehicle is equipped with the Passive Entry system using the Passive Entry system to LOCK the vehicle will cause the parking lights to flash This feature can be turned on or turned off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in
168. buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s or front passenger s seat belt is buckled BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s or passen ger s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h For front passenger seats equipped with BeltAlert your vehicle is equipped to detect when it is occupied The BeltAlert warning system is not activated when the front passenger seat is unoccupied The BeltAlert warn ing system may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie BeltAlert Programming The BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following steps NOTE Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend de activating the BeltAlert 1 With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any position except RUN or START buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position but do not start the engine Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step NOTE You must perform t
169. ceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED Note that all channels will be erased Indi vidual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to complete the training for rolling code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you are having any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly appr
170. cia bumper is NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction see your authorized dealer for service Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in ParkSense not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper Objects must not be within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message to be displayed in the instrument cluster 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Drivers must be careful when backing up even CAUTION e The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle including small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close prox imity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system to be able to stop in time when the obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver l
171. ck in the belt 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the anchorage then move it up or down to the position that fits you best S 3 2 Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwi
172. cle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the multifunction lever is released Overhead Console Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console Each light is turned on by pressing the lens Press the lens a second time to turn off the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 Overhead Console Interior Lights The interior lights come on when a door is opened To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open Thi
173. creen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 4 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 5 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 6 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed MEDIA CENTER 130 RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate ee ee ee Lume 042305232 RES Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning t
174. ction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel wil
175. d Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the power sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Express Press the power sunroof switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close opera tion any movement of the power sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the power sunroof switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the power sunroof switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the power sunroof switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button in the center of the power sunroof switch and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent which oper ates regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the power sunroof switch will stop the sunroof N UNDERSTANDING THE
176. d MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the
177. d Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNINCG Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag tha
178. d Gear Additive MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Mi Emissions Control System Maintenance 416 O Required Maintenance Intervals Bl Maintenance Schedule 416 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 416 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES See EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles O
179. d for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the axle The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Change Axle Fluid Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami nants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi tions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of
180. d in the vehicle To Enter the Trunk With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft 1 0 m of the deck lid press the button on the left side of CHMSL Center High Mounted Stop Light which is located on the deck lid NOTE If you inadvertently leave your vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the deck lid the deck lid will automatically unlatch unless another one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmit ters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft 1 0 m of the deck lid 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie To Lock the Vehicle s Doors The front door handles have LOCK buttons located on the outside of the handle with one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver s side press the driver s door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger side press the passenger s door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors NOTE e After an outside handle lock cycle the system will not allow a passive entry to unlock the same door for two seconds However the RKE unlock function will work during this time period e The passive entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle s interio
181. d of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred You can say O letter O for 0 zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Phone Far End Audio Performance Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone e Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found
182. d or replaced Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you E After Securing TIREFIT Sealant in the Tire Follow Step A Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT before continuing 354 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 1 Turn the Mode Select Knob 5 to the Air Mode position 2 Uncoil the Air Pump Hose 7 and connect it to the valve stem 3 Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge 3 If tire pressure is less than 19 psi 1 3 Bar the tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance If the tire pressure is 19 psi 1 3 bar or higher 1 Press the Power Button 4 to on and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading informa tion label on the driver side door opening NOTE If the air pump is equipped with a Deflation Button and the tire becomes over inflated press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing 2 Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem and then reinstall the cap on the valve stem 3 Place the TIREFIT Kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle 4 Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire ser vice center 5 Replace the Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 assembly at your authorized de
183. d rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg NS TA TING AND OPERATING 315 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 lbs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle w
184. d that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death Uconnect Phone Button Depending on the vehicle options either the R radio or the mirror will contain the two control buttons amp Uconnect Phone button and amp VR Voice Command button that will en able you to access the system Voice Command Button Actual button location may vary with the ra t VR dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones If your cellu lar phone supports a different profile e g Headset Prof
185. d the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 e The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 e The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob
186. ded inflation pressure before continuing If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn off the TIREFIT kit N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 353 2 Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle 1 and place the sticker on the instrument panel 3 Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem reinstall the yellow cap on the fitting at the end of the hose and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle storage location Quickly proceed to D Securing TIRE FIT Sealant in the Tire CAUTION e The metal end fitting from Power Plug 8 may get hot after use so should be handled carefully Failure to reinstall the yellow cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 can result in sealant contacting your skin clothing and the vehicle s interior It can also result in sealant contacting internal TIREFIT kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit D Securing TIREFIT Sealant in the Tire Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating tire drive the vehicle 5 miles 8 km or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire Do not exceed 55 mph 88 km h WARNING TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using TIREFIT Do not exceed 55 mph 88 km h until having the tire repaire
187. ding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 311 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
188. dio media and FUNCTION Universal Customer Interface UCI functions SELECT ie advance presets select next folder jump to or start playing songs in playlists etc depend ing on which radio is in the vehicle and if equipped with UCI A When the EVIC is in the Compass Temp Audio screen press the SCROLL button to seek up and down radio stations tracks chapters SCROLL files etc depending on which radio is in the Button vehicle CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic
189. e ABS cannot prevent accidents including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability 302 STARTING AND OPERATING M Brake Assist System BAS This system complements the ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers This system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake appli cation and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefits of this system you must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
190. e Key Fob NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC position With Keyless Go opening the driver s door when the vehicle s ignition switch is placed in ACC or RUN engine stopped will cause the reminder chime to sound Refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operat ing for further information SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses Key Fob with factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle After placing the ignition switch in the RUN position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics This condition will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee CAUTION e Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle u
191. e airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensors signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags SABIC air bags if equipped and front seat belt pretensioners if equipped as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not ex pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep yo
192. e fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued CAUTION e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in an accident Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not required For this reason the dipstick is omitted If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction have your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fur ther information The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe damage to the transmission may occur Your au thorized dealer has the pro
193. e is running press the START STOP button to turn it off Release the brake pedal and press the START SIOP button once or twice to go to the ACC or RUN position Do not start the engine Then follow the in structions shown above to activate the override Five Speed Automatic Transmission Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears i81c93e7e Shift Lever Gear Ranges PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range 286 STARTING AND OPERATING M When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury
194. e it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the AUTO down operation pull up on the switch briefly The power window switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Set tings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information AUTO Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the AUTO up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop The power window switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Open ing either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then go b
195. e multifunction lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 CAUTION Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the wind shield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than off Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multifunc tion lever to select the desired delay interval There are six delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 23 seconds between cycles Windshield Washers To use the washer push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column to the second detent and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles after releasing the multifunction lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is mm turned off the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield c
196. e performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will appear in the odometer or a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the probl
197. e set speed To Activate Push and release the ON OFF button located on the end of the Electronic Speed Control lever The indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate and the cluster will display a Cruise ON message to show that the speed control system is on To turn the system off push and release the ON OFF button again The system indicator light and message will turn off 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when you are not using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the lever downward to SET DECEL and release the cluster will display the Cruise Set message Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE e Electronic Speed Control will only function in 3rd 4th or 5th gear when in the Autostick mode if equipped e The Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a different size tire is installed on one wheel such as the compact spare tire To Deactivate The system will disable Electronic Speed Control without erasing the memory if you e Softly tap the brake pedal e Press the brake pedal e Pull the Electronic
198. e steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you 204 STARTING AND OPERATING ee e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer Power Steering Fluid Check ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering service interval is not required The fluid should only be system This noise should be considered normal andit checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are does not in any way damage the steering system apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho WARNING rized dealer Continued operation with reduced power steering CAUTION assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New V
199. ear door 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or similar object is into the child lock control and pull it downward N Child Lock Control 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door NOTE After disengaging the Child Protection Door Lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 WINDOWS There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which operate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position WARNING Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door control all the door windows eee EE er n Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch or leave a vehicle with Keyless Go in the ACC or RUN position Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Power Window Switches 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie AUTO Down Feature The driver door power window switch and some model passenger door power window switches have an AUTO down feature Press the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go down automati cally To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and releas
200. eating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats You should NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage If installing child seats in adjacent rear seating positions or if your child restraints are not LATCH compatible install the restraints using the vehi cle s seat belts 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE E ei ee ee anata GEREG LATCH Anchorages Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to follow the manufacturer s directions carefully when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with the child restraint system meets the seatback and are just visible when ue you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it wz In addition there are tether strap anchorages sy behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with this symbol on it Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side
201. ed e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range Adding 1 0 gt 1 0 1 of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule f
202. eft triggers a downshift and to the right an upshift The gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the transmission range indicator NOTE e In AutoStick mode the transmission will shift up and down when the driver manually moves the shift lever right D or left D e An UPSHIFT message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC portion of the in strument cluster when using AutoStick This message appears in order to alert the driver to upshift to the next gear The UPSHIFT message will display while operating the vehicle at higher engine revolutions per minute RPM You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal When you wish to engage AutoStick simply move the shift lever to the right D or left D while in the DRIVE position The transmission will remain in the current gear until an upshift or downshift is chosen When you wish to disengage AutoStick hold the shift lever to the right 290 STARTING AND OPERATING M for at least one second The transmission will now operate automatically shifting between the five available gears General Information You can start out in first or second gear The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy
203. ehicle Limited Warranty CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may Occur ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage ES d Parking Brake 296 STARTING AND OPERATING ee When the parking brake is applied with the ignition make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in parking brake should alway
204. ehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Vehicle speed The gear shifting process is continuously adapted de pendent on the driving style the driving situation and the road characteristics 282 STARTING AND OPERATING x NOTE After selecting any driving position wait a moment to allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating especially when the engine is cold If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position OFF position with Keyless Go before restarting Transmission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds after restart if the ignition switch is not turned to the LOCK position OFF position with Keyless Go first The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating Therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the break in period This is a normal condition and pre cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the brake pedal must be firmly pressed before the shift lock will release Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied Do not r
205. el you should 22 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the
206. elease the brake pedal until ready to drive The vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift lever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 WARNING Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the transmission into PARK remove the key fob from the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key fob is removed from the ignition the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle Over Temperature Mode The transmission electronics constantly monitor the transmission oil temperature If the transmission exceeds normal operating temperature the transmission will change the way it shifts to help control the condition This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in DRIVE position After the transmission cools down it will return to normal operation Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior to rotating the ignition switch to the LOCK posi tion The key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift l
207. em if equipped Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Compass display Outside temperature display Trip computer functions Uconnect Phone displays if equipped Uconnect gps screens if equipped Audio mode display Surround Sound modes if equipped with Driver Selectable Surround DSS Performance Pages if equipped The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel MENU Button gt Press and release the MENU button and the mode displayed will change between Trip Functions Performance Pages if equipped Uconnect gps if equipped System Warn ings System Status and Personal Settings Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept a selection The FUNCTION SELECT button also functions as a remote sound system con FUNCTION trol Refer to Remote Sound System Controls SELECT Button A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip Functions Performance Pages if equipped Uconnect gps if equipped System Status SCROLL Messages and Personal Settings Customer Button Programmable Features The SCROLL button also functions as a remote sound system con trol Refer to Remote Sound System Controls J AUDIO MODE Button Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the Compass Temp Audio screen Along with compass reading and outside temperature this
208. em continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration I v nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently For states that require an Inspection and Mainte serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen 368 MAI
209. ener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 6 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are desig
210. enger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX Se Id About Your Brakes 0004 295 297 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 298 301 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 384 POCO UC 20 us oe ax por ee seh Geo ae ek 337 Adding Washer Fluid 2 44 2 ed ee Re Ee a ods 379 Additives Fuel uu auus uod DR dOR RC peg doa Ro vx 200 Adjustable Pedals us cce eps aed uu c cai 153 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 372 Air Conditioner Maintenance 375 Air Cotiditioning Filter assesses Ge N Se RR 269 376 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 270 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 375 376 Air Conditioning System 263 379 Air Pressure Tires 0 000000 eee 318 ur P a 53 62 Airbag Deployment rsrsrsr REPRE Rd 64 ANDIE ACH osse e tore PER EES 61 66 81 191 ADAS NIOIBIODADGO xa E439 3998 RE ER VERS 65 PUBIC IdE Pm 60 62 Airbag Window Side Curtain 56 60 62 Alarmi Panie see Se eee EER eee ee NERDY 22 Alarm Se Naty ux uq exque S qoe hes 17 195 Alarm System Security Alarm 17 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio sss 253 Antifreeze Engine Coolant si ies cet 383 412 Disposal s chee
211. ensitivity of the system is adjustable from the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 6 is the most sensitive Choose setting 3 or 4 for normal rain conditions Choose setting 2 or 1 if you desire less wiper sensitivity Choose setting 5 or 6 if you desire more sensitivity The rain sense wipers will automatically change between an intermit tent wipe slow wipe and a fast wipe depending on the amount of moisture that is sensed on the windshield Place the multifunction lever in the off position when not using the system NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 NOTE The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper speed is in the low or high position The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind shield Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance The Rain Sensing feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the wiper blades and arms It will not operate under the following conditions e Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN position the vehicle is stationary a
212. er label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure STARTING AND OPERATING 313 Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location SER Shoo PARR Et RoR EE ERE SORE ASEITA S SS NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed di uu d SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 on the driver s side B Pillar P195 70R14 T125 70D15 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION an 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry Tire Placard Location 314 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front an
213. erature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 If an examination of your engine compartment shows no e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the i i P d lean e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the e radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recov
214. ervoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 WARNING WARNING Continued e e e e e e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake To avoid contamination from foreign matter or fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a accident Overfilling the brak
215. ery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system fail ure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the MAX mark on the side of the master cylinder res
216. ery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions 356 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NOTE The remote battery posts are viewed by standin y standing a on the right side of the vehicle looking over the fender Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury Preparations for Jump Start The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk RE Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the 1 Remote Negative Post engine compartment for jump starting 2 Remote Positive Post N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 357 Remote Battery Posts 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories WARNING 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF
217. eturn to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a cellular and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the EVR button while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 e After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will e Note that only the phonebook in the current language ask you which designation you wish to delete home is deleted work cellular pager or all Say the designation you e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be wish to delete deleted or edited List All Names in the Uconnect Phonebook 3 e Press the button to begin e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
218. ever is locked in PARK Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock BTSI system that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position OFF position with Keyless Go To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch 284 STARTING AND OPERATING ee must be turned to the ON or START position engine is running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical system malfunction occurs i e dead battery To access the override remove the rubber tray from the storage bin located to the right of the shift lever The override access port is at the top of the bin to the right of the shift lever gate 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position RUN position with Keyless Go without starting the engine 2 Firmly set the parking brake 3 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 4 Using the screwdriver press and hold the override tab through the access port on the center console 8 1C7982e Interlock Manual Override 5 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position 6 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 7 Reinstall the override cover NS TA TING AND OPERATING 285 With Keyless Go If the engin
219. ey which stores in the rear of the Key Fob NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry Keyless Go PEKG the Key Fob will also contain a special receiver that communicates with the vehicle Passive Entry Keyless Go Key Fobs can only be used with Passive Entry Keyless Go equipped vehicles Non Passive Entry Keyless Go Key Fobs can only be used with Non Passive Entry Keyless Go vehicles The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead The emergency key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 020207467 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Removing Key Fob From Ignition and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 min Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the Key Fob to the utes after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF OFF position and then remove the Key Fob position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instru
220. film and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds programmable when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area To activate the delay feature place the ignition in the OFF position while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off If you turn on the headlights or parking lights or place the ignition to ON again the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of placing the ignition in OFF position to activate this feature The Headlight delay time is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime Running Lights whenever the ignition is placed in the ON position the headlights are off and the parking brake is released The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position a chime will sound to alert the drive
221. for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 430 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES See 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 138 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter m Change the engine oil and engine oil H Rotate tires filter L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner J Rotate tires filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 431 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or This maintenance is recommended by the
222. g all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel backwards counter clockwise to get to the track faster e In List mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod Preset 1 Playlists Preset 2 Artists Preset 3 Albums Preset 4 Genres Preset 5 Audiobooks Preset 6 Podcasts e Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line e To Exit List mode without selecting a track press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode e LIST button The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item to be selected and press the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the iPod then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are available on this system e MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee CAUTION e Leaving the iPod or any supported device any where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device Follow the device manufacturer s guidelines Placing items on the iPod or connections to the iPod in the veh
223. g and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF ap pears NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SE LECT button until ON or OFF appears Headlights On with Wipers When ON is selected and the HEADLIGHT switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Delay Turning Headlights Off When thi
224. h 16 km h ParkSense can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC when the vehicle is in PARK Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 ParkSense uses four sensors located in the rear bumper to scan for obstacles up to 79 in 200 cm away from the rear bumper fascia The ParkSense Warning Display located above the rear window provides both visible and audible warnings to indicate the range of the object 032805242 ParkSense LED Display The Warning Display contains two sets of yellow and red indicators one set to warn of obstacles behind the left rear of the vehicle and the other set to warn of obstacles behind the right rear of the vehicle The driver can view the indicators either through the rearview mirror or by looking at the display above the rear window ParkSense dimly illuminates the two inner most yellow indicators when it is ON and detecting no obstacles The following chart shows the warning display operation when the system is detecting an obstacle 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES DISPLAY INDICA OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM INDICATOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL TOR REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER COLOR Inner LED 1 HEE 79 in 200 cm Yes Half Second 1st LE
225. h the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 4 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 5 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off
226. he ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequenc
227. he following steps within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the RUN position 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the RUN position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the driver s seat belt is unbuckled NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if so equipped is in i
228. he phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the Uconnect Phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it le will only use the first 24 characters Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE e Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work cellular or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or r
229. he tire should be replaced 322 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e lire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or cap
230. heck for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS bre SARON EE ORO 90 3 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors 93 o Automatic Dimming Mirror 90 MH Uconnect Phone If Equipped 93 Eli utide MIMOS we adus eae ED quss rd eS 91 DUPETA ON siese ee cs tunes ear EE 96 H Outside Mirrors Folding Feature Phone Call Features usato ea ees 104 ME O Uconnect Phone Features 107 pe eG ok Dig aoe pana O Advanced Phone Connectivity 111 o Tilt Mirror In Reverse uos onse Ron 92 Things You Should Know About Your EL Power MITOS sos creari AAR ER ORE GR es 92 Uconnect P PRONE s aas tet RET OR Rod he 113 o Heated Mirrors If Equipped 93 U General Information iss 2
231. heir back NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle e Improper installation can lead to failure of an where you will use it before you buy it infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy not work when you need it ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or hag e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child fatal injury to the infant restraint manufacturer s directions Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the restraint
232. her Strap Mounting 1 Cover A Tether Strap Hook 3 Attaching Strap B Tether Anchor 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 3 Attach the tether strap hook A of the child restraint to the anchor B and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions NOTE Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within
233. hone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from
234. ical flushes in your air conditioning Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor oil and refrigerants A C Air Filter The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle next to the windshield wipers When installing a new filter ensure its proper orientation 1 Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips x Access Door 2 Slide the lid on the filter adapter forward and down and remove the used filter
235. icle can cause damage to the device and or to the connectors WARNING Do not plug in or remove the iPod while driving Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident Uconnect Multimedia SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN RER RES RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number
236. if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor dance with local laws Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the Key Fob in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between OFF and RUN and then back to OFF four times ending up in the OFF position do not start engine 3 Press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Auto
237. igh This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat Driving with a hot cooling system could damage from the engine cooling system your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads 240 116 C or greater pull over and stop the vehicle Idle WARNING the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range 200 230 F 93 110 C If the pointer remains at 240 F 116 C or greater and you hear a chime turn the engine off immediately and call for service You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition TIREFIT KIT Small punctures up to 1 4 6 mm in the tire tread can be sealed with TIREFIT Foreign objects e g screws or nails should not be removed from the tire TIREFIT can e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum be used in outside temperatures down to approximately heat the mode control to floor and the blower control id DE e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this hea
238. ignition switch is on You can be injured by WARNING moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result Jump Starting Procedure WARNING 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission Failure to follow this procedure could result in per into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex plosion 358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery WARNING Do not connect the cable t
239. il Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 417 NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In strument Cluster Description Odometer Tri
240. il the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power until the ignition key is re moved or the ignition switch is changed to OFF using the Keyless Go Start Stop button e Unlock the doors automatically 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie If a Deployment Occurs The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately e As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or
241. ile you may not be able to use any Uconnect Phone features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry
242. ill be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg 316 STARTING AND OPERATING ee TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 EXAMPLE 3 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 Ibs 865 Ibs Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib est 160 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 tbs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs 325 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock O
243. ill read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset e Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Display Units of Measure in To make your selection
244. into the normal range 200 230 F 93 110 C If the pointer remains at 240 F 116 C or greater and you hear a chime turn the engine OFF immediately and call for service 15 Trip Odometer Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of two trip odometer settings The letter A or B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles km The odometer must be in TRIP mode to reset it 16 High Beam Light ED This light will turn on when the high beam headlights are ON Push the multifunction lever away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to high beam 17 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission 18 Seat Belt Reminder Light This light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first placed in the RUN position A chime will sound if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check The Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled after the bulb check or when driving Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 19 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This ligh
245. ion automatically upshifts through fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions in hilly terrain travel ing into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick mode and select the 3 range Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission 288 STARTING AND OPERATING M temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts the transmission is most likely operating in the Limp Home Mode In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate Sec ond gear will operate in the DRIVE position The Mal function Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be driven to an autho
246. ion cap from the 16 pin connector port prior to connecting the cable e f the iPod battery is completely discharged it may not communicate with the UCI system until a mini mum charge is attained Leaving the iPod connected to the UCI system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI 16 pin connector port e The iPod audio can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display e The iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector if supported by the specific iPod device Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 Once in the UCI iPod mode iPod audio tracks if available from iPod start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod automatically starts Play mode In Play mode use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track e T
247. ion switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever is not in PARK the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position If the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed once the EVIC if equipped will display a Vehicle Not In Park message and the engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll 278 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 60 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position Keyless Go Functions With Driver s Foot OFF the Brake Pedal Pedal In PARK or NEUTRAL Position The Keyless Go feature operates similar to an ignition switch It has four positions OFF ACC RUN and START To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps e Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position e Press the ENGINE START STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY e Press the ENGINE START STOP butto
248. ire Rotation Recommendations 324 o Fuel System Cautions ss vua 6450446444 336 O Tire Rotation Standard Tires 925 O Carbon Monoxide Warnings 907 O Tire Rotation All Season Tires 9025 Mi Facel sag essor ove epee TIUS trni 337 274 STARTING AND OPERATING See E Puel Piller Cap Gas Cap uie seer RE 337 El veil ad NS oes 4450 ee Sta ROK ese 341 O Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 339 ELOA AARON ETE OT EE 341 W Vehicle Loading 340 MB Trailer Towing 00 342 O Vehicle Certification Label 340 Mi Recreational Towing 4 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 340 Behind Motorhome Etc 342 O Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 340 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Automatic Transmission The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine Apply the bra
249. is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone e Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu lar phone is accessible Only the cellular phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the cellular phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the eo button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phone book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e T
250. isplay a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow ing licenses TEE EES EE EE SOET ER KR55120123 2671 5120123 United States Canada FUEL REQUIREMENTS 6 1L Engine The 6 1L engine is designed
251. ist mode enables will go back to the play mode screen on the radio scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod e Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod EOS mode to repeat the current playing track e TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions i imil h Il wheel he iPod e Press the SCAN button to use iPod scan mode which N a Slmtar manner as the scro wheel on the 1 od will play the first five seconds of each track in the e Turning it clockwise forward and counterclock current list and then forward to the next song To stop wise backward scrolls through the lists displaying SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when the track detail on the radio display Once the track it is playing the track press the SCAN button again to be played is highlighted on the radio display During Scan mode pressing the lt lt SEEK and SEEK press the TUNE control knob to select and start gt gt buttons will select the previous and next tracks playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticed e RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 e Durin
252. kes before shifting into any driving gear CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Using Fob With Integrated Key Tip Start NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal 276 STARTING AND OPERATING M Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Keyless Go uum This feature allows the driver to oper ate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the ENGINE SIART STOP button is installed and the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter is in the passenger compart ment 0501052
253. kward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the s
254. l Off 45 sec 5 min 10 min 30 min or 60 min appears Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped When ON is selected all voice commands from the Uconnect system are confirmed To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Park Assist System When ON is selected the system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE or NEUTRAL position To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Turn by Turn Navigation If Equipped When ON is selected the turn by turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig nated turn within a programmed route To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 Display Units of Measure in The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until EN GLISH or METRIC appears Automatic High Beams If Equipped When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION faye EN SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Refer
255. l continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone lf Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle KICKER HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER SELECTABLE SURROUND DSS IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio amplifier that provides 5 1 channel surround sound from UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 any stereo audio source A new feature of the KICKER audio system offers the ability to choose surround sound for any audio source Audio Surround is optimized for front seat passengers for any audio source This surround effect is available for audio from any source AM FM CD Satellite Radio or AUX and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
256. l of the vehicle and have an accident Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty 5 weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate 342 STARTING AND OPERATING ee NOTE e Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR and GAWRSs
257. lation value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing and the TPM Telltale Light will 330 STARTING AND OPERATING turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received 81979401 If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire
258. ld or others could be e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition or leave a vehicle with Keyless Go in the ACC or RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the When leaving the vehicle always remove the key vehicle from the ignition and lock your vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe Power Door Locks personal injuries and death A power door lock switch is on each front door trim Continued panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors Power Door Lock Switch If you press the power door lock switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition ACC or RUN position and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle Removing the Key Fob returning the ignition mode to the OFF position or closing the door will allow THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 the locks to operate If a door is open the Key Fob is in the ignition OFF or ACC position a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Go opening the driver s door when the vehicle s ignition switch is placed in ACC or RUN engine stopped will cause the reminder chime to sound Refer to Star
259. le Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further dam age Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 WARNING POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good e Driving through standing water limits your vehi vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical 8 km h when driving through standing water steering capability if power assist is lost Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you NOTE stranded e Increased noise levels at the end of th
260. le PCM Stop Sa m i Light Switch EE EE e e 7 laere ETE EEE EMEN EE P 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 30 10 Amp Door Modules Power 38 10 Amp Cargo Light Satellite Red Mirrors Steering Con Red Receiver SDARS Video trol Module SCM If Equipped Vehicle CS NN NM Information Module If 32 l i Equipped BEEK IF T Beate Moos ETE ER ER 40 5 Amp Auto Inside Rearview 25 9 Amp Antenna Module If Orange Mirror Heated Seats If Orange Equipped Power Mir Equipped Switch Bank 41 36 25 Amp Hands Free Phone If uff ET TE Natural Egapped Video Moni o egre Front Bower Molor tor If Equipped Radio Hi 37 15 Amp Transmission 30 Amp p Rear Window Defroster Blue Pink Description Amplifier If Equipped Sunroof If Equipped Cavities 11 12 and 13 contain self resetting fuses circuit breakers that are only serviceable by an autho rized dealer The cluster and the driver seat switch are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 11 The passenger seat switch is fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 12 The door modules the driver power window switch and the passenger power window switch are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 13 If you experience temporary or permanent loss of these systems see your authorized dealer for service MAINTAIN
261. le filled to MAX level EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operat ing conditions the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine Engine Oil oils that meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 10725 and are approved to MB 229 3 or MB 229 5 The manufacturer recom mends the use of a full synthetic 5W 40 or equivalent engine oil Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs PLZTR5A 13 Gap 0 040 in 1 01 mm Fuel Selection Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or higher 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Component Automatic Transmission Brake Master Cylinder Power Steering Reservoir Rear Axle Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recom mended brake fluids MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Trans mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product MOPAR Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent with MOPAR Friction Modifier Hypoi
262. le to prevent carbon monoxide and other kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the ADDING FUEL vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap ventilation system to force fresh outside air into The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the the vehicle left side of the vehicle If so equipped use the finger pull to open the door Otherwise push in on the left side near the edge of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle Continued 338 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION NOTE When removing the fuel filler cap lay the cap tether in the hook located on the fuel filler cap door reinforcement Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full 28178cbce DEE NEN
263. lear this message The ESP OFF message may appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion To turn ESP ON again momentarily press the ESP OFF switch NOTE The ESP OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved into the PARK position from any position other than PARK and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur when the message was previously cleared WARNING In the ESP Full Off mode the engine torque reduction and stability features are cancelled There fore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable NOTE When the ESP is switched OFF a feature of the system remains active This feature controls wheel spin across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with tire chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF switch 306 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING With the ESP switched OFF the enhanced vehicle stability offered by
264. lian Language English Language French Language Spanish Tutorial Voice Training N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Command vr button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the Voice Command SVR button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle They need to be used properly for safe operation of the vehicle WARNING e DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 128 U
265. lines to maintain your vehicle s Most of these products contain high concentra performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed some light smoke your engine may be out of tune against you or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance Continued NS 1AH TING AND OPERATING 337 Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Continued WARNING e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate trunk closed when driving your vehic
266. llowing beep say e You can also press the button at any time while Setup Phone Pairing the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Cellular Phones e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the amp button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the ve button for five seconds until the session begins or 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Press
267. luids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corro sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator Continued 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula e This vehicle has not been designed for use with HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or propylene glycol based engine coolant anti equivalent freeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to Adding Coolant exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine anticipated coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 102 000 miles 170 00
268. manufacturer 150 Months Maintenance to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions Service Schedule warranty L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil WARNING filter HI Rotate tires 1 Replace the engine air cleaner filter e You can be badly injured working on or around a H Adjust parking brake on vehicles motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform equipped with four wheel disc brakes a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your pnr per hues Gas ERROR ETTET 435 O Prepare For The Appointment 435 df te dies PESE 44444 d eed apne ade gaa 435 o Be Reasonable With Requests 435 N If You Need Assistance 435 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 436 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 436 Hn Medco Contactes ss x Ee AD RAS uai 436 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 437 A Seve CONT
269. matic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Passive Entry System If Equipped The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle s Remote Keyless Entry RKE system This fea ture allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons NOTE e Passive Entry may be programmed ON OFF refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e f a passive entry door handle has not been used for 72 hours the passive entry feature for that handle may time out Also if it has been raining on a passive entry door handle for 24 hours that door handle s passive entry feature may be deactivated Pulling the deacti vated front door handle will reactivate that door handle s passive entry feature e f wearing hand gloves the Passive Entry door handle unlock sensitivity can be affected resulting in a slower response time To Unlock From The Driver s Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver s side of the vehicle grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver s door automati cally NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver s door handle To select bet
270. ment 29 Ma rank Safety Warning esas oy qe eee mt 41 O General Information 40 24 O Trunk Emergency Release 42 lll Remote Starting System If Equipped 24 Wi Occupant Restraints 0 42 o How To Use Remote Start 25 EL Lap ShOulder Belts 3222343 dee MA ER RAD EE 44 IE Door Locks 4444444060056 66264484864 S 27 O Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 49 O Manual Door Locks ills 27 0 Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode O Power Door Locks ere mom a s oe RE EE ees 28 a D ED Sie ET ais 29 7l Passive Entry System If Equipped 32 O Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped 50 Child Protection Door Lock gt s x MN a BM Windows veo e duy RS eed owns 37 nente And N N 53 O Power Windows lee 37 O Seat Belt Extender 5312522 9 m 53 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 O Supplemental Restraint System SRS E Transporting Passengers sela ARE RR 79 AE TE 9 Ed dii GAS 4 544 te kee ees ten eee A 80 H Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls 60 J Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The p D Event Data Recorder EDR 67 ie sea ER EY SUR EU E RES A I os 81 EC hild Restraints ie dcum iig ae AR ae 69 O Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Mi Engine Break In Recommendations 78 Hut SI VEE aie le EE RR TE EE OOR EE NG 79 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHIC
271. ment Panel for further information With the Passive Entry Keyless Go system the EVIC will display the ignition switch position OFF ACC RUN Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE WARNING e For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the Key Fob in the ignition or a vehicle equipped with Keyless Go in the ACC or RUN mode A child could operate power e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power windows other controls or move the vehicle window switches radio power sunroof if equipped N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC sounds a signal to remind you to remove th
272. meter Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer O C C C O L LL L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102 000 miles 170 000 km Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 424 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service 66 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter m Change the engine oil and engine oil H Rotate tires filter L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner J Rotate tires filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter
273. mfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary wi
274. minals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling Continued should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants at the start of each warm season This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this flammable and can explode injuring you Other time unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to CAUTION Do not use chem
275. mpt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cellular phone directly WARNING Your phone must be turned on and paired to the Uconnect Phone System to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cellular phone has network coverage and stays paired to the Uconnect Phone System Towing Assistance coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24 Hour Towing Assistance references If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to
276. n 3 to 8 cm from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view For optimal training point the battery end of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter button until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED Then release both the HomeLink and handheld trans mitter buttons If the EVIC display states DID NOT TRAIN repeat Step 3 If the signal is too weak replace the battery in the handheld transmitter It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button If the channel has been trained the EVIC display will now state CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the EVIC display still states CHANNEL TRAIN ING repeat Step 3 NOTE After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door op
277. n products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 439 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain othe
278. n a second time to change the ignition switch to the RUN position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE RUN e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time to return the ignition switch to the OFF position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE OFF Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended If Engine Fails To Start WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Continued NS TA TING AND OPERATING 279 WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Start ing in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Clearing a Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal
279. n entering and exiting the vehicle The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Go e When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Go the driver seat will move about 2 4 in 60 mm rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2 7 in 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition in the ACC or RUN position When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Go the driver seat will move to a position 0 3 in 7 7 mm forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 0 9 in and 2 7 in 22 7 mm and 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition in the ACC or RUN position N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 e The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0 9 in 22 7 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature can
280. n five seconds The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display which memory position is being set If desired a second memory profile can be stored into memory as follows N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 1 Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences i e seat side mirror adjustable pedals power tilt telescopic steering column and radio station presets 2 Press and release the SET button on the Memory switch then press the side of the rocker switch labeled 2 within five seconds The EVIC will display which memory position is being set NOTE e Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile e The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled For details refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information Linking and Unlinking the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To program your RKE transmitters perform the follow ing 1 Remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Go 2 Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2 3 Press and release the SET b
281. n the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener with 033906001 out these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 HomeLink Buttons 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu safety information or assistance rity Alarm is active Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for up to 20 seconds The EVIC will display CLEARING CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC mes sage states CHANNELS CLEARED It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage while training 1 Place the ignition in the RUN position 2 Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 i
282. nat If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer NOTE The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle tended e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Go always remember to place the ignition in OFF At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the authorized dealer NN THINGS TO KNOW B
283. nd the outside temperature is below 32 F 0 C unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside temperature rises above freezing Neutral Wipe Inhibit The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN position the transmission shift lever is in the NEU TRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph 8 km h unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN To tilt the steering column move the lever up or down as IF EQUIPPED desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull This feature allows you to tilt the steering column the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or desired shorten the steering column The power tilt telescoping steering column lever is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column EK NOTE For vehicles eguipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to return the tilt telescopic steering column to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section 81270909 amp Power Tilt Telescoping Steering NN UNDERSTANDI
284. ned to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 successfully accepted the frequency signal The EVIC display will change from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Place the ignition in the RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for 20 seconds until the EVIC display states CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button pro
285. nfirmatian EF pin code Phones select ine Lst Prones Voice Tree Setup Confirmation Select Audio SMS Incoming m ninm Device Towing New phone Select a language well English Espanol temporarily or Francais Prompts mar override phone priorities lo be deleted List Phones Enter Nama of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing System Lists Phones Mote Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 119 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Primar e O C G Voice Commands Primar call cancel confirmation prompts continue delete dial download edit emergenc English erase all Espanol Francais help home N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 medial N send 0 o 0000000 0 0 towing assistance MM o Uconnect Tutorial J waa O nn OO SO transfer call pute phone settings or phone pmute off au NODE vo previous record again o yes 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e Thi
286. ng Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel NOTE The transmission must be in PARK before the button will operate N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter twice within five seconds Blacafd7 Trunk Release Button With the ignition switch in the RUN position the Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key removed from the ignition switch the Trunk Open sym bol will display until the trunk is closed Refer to Passive Entry If Equipped under Door
287. ng brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic BRAKE brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability the remaining system will still function There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine OFF the brakes will still function The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating 298 STARTING AND OPERATING M Anti Lock Brake System The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up The electronic brake force distribution EBD prevents the rear wheels from over braking and
288. ngle beep Redial Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the cellular phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the cellular phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to OPE NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e C
289. nt that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPM sensor 328 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Premium System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure level
290. nto the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected Rear Power Distribution Center 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw IOD uM RN Yellow Cavity 1 of the hn Equipped Center contains a black few IOD fuse needed for ing assembly The ser vice replacement part is 15 Amp Diagnostic Link Connec a 60 Amp yellow car Blue tor DLC Wireless Con tridge fuse trol Module WCM Lem 40 Amp aa Integrated Power Mod Mi Ignition Node G le IPM 20 Amp Power Out 40 A T GP Mod Yellow mp ntegrated Fower Mod EE mes EE EE ue NN E e i MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 2 a cbe ee EE 1 Red Cluster Security Mod 25 ule If Equipped 2 G AO ME 27 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Con C GC Ss bee a aad 17 20 Amp Cluster 28 10 Amp Ignition Run Yellow Red 18 ad ane das 29 5 Amp Cluster Electronic Sta Yellow Orange bility Program ESP Red Modu
291. nu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Radio FM e Previous Channel to select the previous channel T itch to the F FM or Radio FM I dde m ee dy ordine Pag List Channel to hear a list of available channels e Frequency to change the frequency e Select Name to say the name of a channel l Radio M t itch to th di e Next Station to select the next station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu BT s 44 I1 h h 3 e Previous Station to select the previous station e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc Radio Menu t itch to the radi ae Mc ne el OE G OE To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you e Main Menu to switch to the main menu may say the following commands Satellite Radio To s
292. o N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 e Video Surround e Audio Surround While in the Surround Sound menu press the FUNC TION SELECT button to change surround modes The Video Surround Mode will only be available for video media sources DVDs Video CDs or other video media supported by the radio Compass Display The compass readings indicate the direction 1 the vehicle is facing Press and release the HOME button to display one of eight compass HOME Teadings and the outside temperature Button NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL message does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the
293. o may allow water to get into the integrated power module and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected Integrated Power Module MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 Cavity Car Mini Description Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse NES Fuse id Amp Washer Motor 30 Amp Windshield Wiper Pink 25 Amp Powertrain Control 30 Amp Anti Lock Brake System Natural Module PCM Pink ABS Valves 25 Amp Ignition Run Start 40 Amp Natural Green Radiator Fan Radiator Fan mnm Ignition Coils n Injectors LR ma EN m 4 25 Amp Alternator 50 Amp Anti Lock Brake System aa EE ABS Pump Motor 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car Description Rear Power Distribution Center There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel This center contains fuses and relays Opening the Access Panel N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 CAUTION e When installing the power distribution center cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get i
294. o load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 MEDIA CENTER 130 RES RSC AM FM Operating Instructions Radio Mode STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX l JACK AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side teddie eerste Power Switch Volume Control
295. o recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped and power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets When OFF is selected only the memory switch on the driver s door panel will recall memory profiles To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SE LECT button until ON or OFF appears Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers When ON is selected the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears When OFF is selected the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit If Equipped This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when enterin
296. o the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the remote negative post of the vehicle with the dis charged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 359 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or sno
297. ocated on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward The light turns on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the light eee Dor Illuminated Vanity Mirror Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the Uconnect website for supported phones For Uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile cellular phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standar
298. on Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 247 9753 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 NN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 437 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufact
299. on a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator
300. ont Airbags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a win dow If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags they are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 NOTE e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment S One EE Es e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch e After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an and ee a ee N ee authorized dealer immediately Advanced Front Airbag Features The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver and front passenger airbags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as Airbag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag system components e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Airbag Warning Light is mf receive information from the front impact EE
301. ontinue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may Towing Assistance not be applicable with the available cellular service If you need towing assistance d i and area e Press the button to begin e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Emergency e After the Ready pro
302. ooks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense when using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist sys tem Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedes trians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 WARNING Continued OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights e Before using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist and storage for sunglasses Universal Garage Door system it is strongly recommended that the ball Opener HomeLink buttons and power sunroof switch mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected may also be included if equipped from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone Also the ParkSense sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle 8125e191 Overhead Console 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Courtesy Re
303. or damage The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position e When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument panel to ensure it is in the PARK position CAUTION Damage to the shift lever could result if the shift lever is moved out of PARK before the ignition switch is turned from the LOCK OFF position with Keyless Go to the ON position RUN position with Keyless Go REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Use only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop ee STARTING AND OPERATING 287 NEUTRAL This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro longed periods with engine running Engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle CAUTION Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmission damage WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmiss
304. or further information N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 10725 and are approved to MB 229 3 or MB 229 5 will be listed on the back label of the oil container The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic 5W 40 or equivalent engine oil CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 40 engine oil is preferred for use in all operating temperatures The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is
305. or icy conditions Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is en gaged The transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached while AutoStick is engaged e Transmission shifting will be more crisp abrupt when AutoStick is engaged DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5
306. or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather Automatic Temperature Control 815b5818 Automatic Temperature Controls Automatic Operation The Dual Zone Climate Control System automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Operation of the system is quite simple Begin by turning the mode control knob on the right to AUTO and place the blower control knob on the left to either LO AUTO or HI AUTO The LO AUTO position should be used for front seat occupants only The HI AUTO position should be used when more airflow is desired or when rear seat occupants are present Then dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver or passenger temperature control knob Once the comfort level is selected the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system Should the de sired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automa
307. or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the amp button and follow the audible prompts for directions All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the amp button on the radio control head N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone to a Cellular Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your celluar phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions e Press the button to begin e After the
308. ormation Center EVIC 199 Emergency Deck Lid Release ceucb edrira a3 Rs 2 s 42 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck sss agis 1444s ds 359 Hazard Warning Flasher s lt a026seeeevenns 344 JUMP lane sos ote nas 3 RAS oS eee Ee ee 355 OVEIMICAUNS Lasse hih48 4 Rade ieee de s 344 TOWING ET PX eta ce eee PUTES ES IE ERES 360 Emergency Ir nk Release nsss iis nrs ced e a 42 Emission Control System Maintenance 367 416 BUB 1 4 9 39A SE DE RY OR ee ea ESI 365 Due MD SP BIO del AE SERIES ES 280 Break In Recommendations 78 Checking Oil Level s uu eus ARE aera baa es 370 COIDDSEUMIBB s e s se ER HOED PEER RR HORA 365 Coolant Antifreeze 382 413 COOUNG 2 4446 44000 ee Soe NEE EE ous 382 Ne INDEX 449 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 80 337 Pails tO OE is ons DEEL ROKER Ae Oe EE 278 Hooded Staring ses qus SERS HA 278 Fuel Requirements si o kan dee opos we n n 333 JOM ELE a5 es AR ea eee EE AAR BA a iu 355 9 arr 370 412 413 OLC hance Miera suceder EE RED d oes 370 Piller Cap saai SE ha AO RR OER SES 3 1 LPer 2o murU eL IR EESTI eas 9 2 Oil Filter Disposal aug ance eer pacer a isi 972 CIL Selecon ucc ooo oso p wap x DOE Hoe S SA 371 412 IT ne OE OAR OS OE ees 371 e ul ARE OE N EA EEN 344 OUE eier a RS SEL EERS es 279 Temperature Gage iese ha war Eod RS 939 805 193 Engine Oil Viscosity sses uie rrtt a Cha wee eee 371 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 63 Entr
309. ormation can be found on most washer fluid containers The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal 4 1 of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex WARNING Continued haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep over materials that can burn Such materials might into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve cation or oil change Replace as required hicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn WARNINC e Exhaust g
310. ose to traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the TIREFIT kit Continued N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 349 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the e A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision following circumstances If the cut or puncture in the tire tread is approxi mately 0 24 in 6 mm or larger If the tire has any sidewall damage If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire If the wheel has any damage If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel Keep TIREFIT away from open flame or heat source Continued or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place provided Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to come in contact with hair eyes or clothing TIRE FIT is harmful if inhaled swallowed or absorbed through the skin It causes skin eye and respira tory irritation Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin Change clothing as soon as possible if there is any contact with clothing Continued 350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING
311. otation 326 STARTING AND OPERATING ee TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire
312. ould lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Mist Feature Push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column to the first detent to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction lever Headlights On with Wipers When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Rain Sensing Wipers This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver This feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of the six intermittent wiper settings to activate this feature The s
313. our vehicle or another vehicle if avail able Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the TIREFIT kit 3 The Sealant Bottle 1 may be empty due to previous use Call for assistance NOTE If the Mode Select Knob 5 is on air mode and pump is operating air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose 7 only not the Sealant Hose 6 If the sealant white fluid does flow through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Continue to operate pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose typically takes 30 70 seconds As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose 6 the Pressure Gauge 3 can read as high as 70 psi 5 Bar The Pressure Gauge 3 will decrease quickly from approxi mately 70 psi 5 Bar to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty 2 The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi ately after the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty Continue to operate pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indi cated on the tire pressure label on the driver side latch pillar recommended pressure Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge 3 If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes e The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance NOTE If the air pump is equipped with a Deflation Button and the tire becomes over inflated press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommen
314. oved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi cations were met N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED WARNING The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch or the ignition in the ACC or RUN position when using Keyless Go Occu pants particularly unattended children can be come entrapped by the power sunroof while oper ating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sun Power Sunroof Controls roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result 034207107 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Opening Sunroof Express Press the power sunroof switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any posi tion The sunroof will open fully and then stop automati cally This is calle
315. owever and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 442 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all pass
316. p Odom eter in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level Refer to Maintenance Procedures Engine Oil in Maintaining Your Ve hicle for further information e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 418 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ee e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake CAUTION master cylinder and power steering add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct Failure to perform the required maintenance Items may result in damage to the vehicle operation At Each Oil Change Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 419 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
317. p in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any pressure cap while the system is hot or under accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Disposal of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant antifreeze level is adequate With the engine OFF and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be be tween the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing en gine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temp
318. pecial care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the OFF position The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle NN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 361 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Vehicles eguipped with AWD can be towed with the Flatbed towing is recommended DO NOT tow an AWD transmission in NEUTRAL and the rear wheels OFF the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground unless the ground or the rear driveshaft removed with no limita rear driveshaft is removed and the transmission is in tion on speed or distance NEUTRAL Vehicles WITHOUT AWD may be towed with rear CAUTION wheels on the ground with the transmission in NEU e Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front TRAL under the following conditions with sling type towing equipment Damage to the e The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles front fascia will result 24 km If the transmission is not operative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles 24 km e The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Or faster than 30 mph 48 kph then the only approved method of towing is with a flatbed truck Otherwise damage to the transmission may result CAUTION Exceeding these towing limits may cause severe Do not tow the vehicle from the rear Damage to the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur
319. peel away and jam the player mechanism Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert ejected before a new disc can be loaded a second CD if one is already loaded l l l ED l Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio other side is a CD should not be used and they ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 can cause damage to the player NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
320. per tools to adjust the fluid level accurately N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 Fluid and Filter Changes Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter should be changed Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any trans mission only the approved lubricant may be used Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Rear Axle For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is service
321. phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the EVR button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The Uconnect Phone will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery streng
322. porting 438 Safety Exhaust Gas een ES RARR ss e 604 4 om d 80 Safety Information Tire ie ice ear ee dee oo RR 307 Dueb Wis ga eeduwe seed DERE HOES ERES 79 Satellite Radio Antenna se due BERE EA RR iode 259 Satellite Radio Uconnect studios 292 Schedule Maintenance leen 416 Seat Belt Maintenance uua chus cmd rens 397 Seat Belt Reminder 220222424 etu S PEE Nos lt ol Seat Belts SS ee 42 44 81 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 49 And Pregnant Women 249 iss1ese tages 59 Child Restraint i4 49S oe PROE 69 70 71 76 cun A T 53 Front Se t nse ee aoa ee oe test eee 44 45 loeo aas AR EE KRU HER Hd HHA HR RE 81 Operating Instructions iss soeter DRAERS oa 45 PreCtenSIONGIS sooie 843 46 4 oh de ope ROER boy 50 Real ART fin doa EET ET ES EE d Reinders oen ER HEL DEE DE OU DE RS 195 Untwisting Proc dure sis e gua EROSIE eas SU 49 DOdUS d sea ene ER EE OR dg fede eo ded daria 127 Eon at OR TERE OE RE pee Ea 127 bas CON C 138 lied KOSU ANS ug gesien V 9X EER RE DER 130 Caled m 192 Idee E SOS EDGE ns sas aaa eGo os 29 R08 ER e 128 L mbar Sup POL s 63 4 9 scr gradu enit d Bi 130 MCDO ousisd ase ete VeRO EER E hd 135 OWED 2 ink ARR eee ee YE Ayes PEZ RES 128 Rear Folding ie dis Cake tee eae ees 134 ReCHWING 3 o444754854 oy EED EER KERE RE PES 129 peatodck Release 22 24 pir irekter ERE SE sch 134 N INDEX 459 TUN
323. press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the VR button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the GVR button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the EVR button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the
324. pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM Telltale Light illu minates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the TPM Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipme
325. r also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and the title VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN 010805185 EE INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS N Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl A Word About Your Keys 12 o Wireless Ignition Node WIN 12 Elk os BOB PETRI 13 O Removing Key FOB From Ignition 14 O Key In Ignition Reminder ID ese RENE TT ER NE 15 O Replacement Keys d eas m RE SR Rd n 16 O Customer Key Programming 17 O General Information 17 ll Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped O Rearming Of The System O To Arm The System o To Disarm The System B illuminated Entry If Equipped ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE O To Unlock The Doors O To Lock The Doors O To Unlatch The Trunk 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee o Using The Panic Alarm sis ass EE EERS os 22 O Wind DUGUN 214 264 2546 sn nhs sanee gs ES 40 O Programming Additional Transmitters 29 N Truck Lock And Release 22552885 ees Des 40 O Transmitter Battery Replace
326. r door panel Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with a Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or similar object into the child lock control and pull it upward NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 NOTE For emergency key information refer to A NOTE When the Child Protection Door Lock system is Word About Your Keys engaged the door can be opened only by using the B BELLE outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death NOTE e After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock sys tem always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position Child Lock Control 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e For emergency exit with the system engaged move the door lock plunger to the UNLOCK position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the r
327. r information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the 440 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee vehicle system and or components is written in e Owner s Manuals straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and m
328. r when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights O The front fog light switch is built into the head light switch To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the headlight switch To turn off the front fog lights either press headlight switch again or turn off the headlight switch An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on NOTE The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on However selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The lever is located on the left side of the steering column UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 031507267 Multifunction Lever Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE i If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective NOTE A Turn Signal On message will appear in the EVIC and a continuous chime will sound if the vehi
329. rasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any condition is N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its function Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid reservoir apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating inf
330. re Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 426 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 90 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter m Change the engine oil and engine oil H Rotate tires filter L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner Rotate tires filter and replace if necessary Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the exhaust system Adjust parking brake on vehicles Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for equipped with four wheel disc brakes damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 427 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or
331. red automatic or blower and mode preferred automatic This means the operator can override the center of the instrument panel should be kept free of blower the mode or both There is a manual blower debris due to the location of the climate control l range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired sensors Mud on the windshield may also cause poor 6 anemone Dose lem The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by P rotating the blower control knob on the left NOTE e For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start opera tion if the blower control is left in the O Off position e Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begin to fog press the recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured inte rior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow recirculation to be selected while in Defrost or Defrost Floor mode e Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Op Attempting to use the recirculation while in these eration Chart that follows for details modes will cause the indicator in the control button to blink and then turn off Automatic Temperature Control Operation Operation 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL How Blower Control Mode Control The system will Air Temperature Control
332. rized dealer for service To reset the transmission use the following procedure Stop the vehicle Move the shift lever into the PARK position 1 2 3 Turn the engine off 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Move the shift lever to the desired range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 If the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears AUTOSTICK AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission that offers manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Operation By placing the shift lever in the DRIVE position it can be moved from side to side This allows the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears Moving the shift lever to the l
333. rs Advanced Front Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag Children 12 years old and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Refer to Child Restraints Assistance You sho
334. rs for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflat ing Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Continued NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 The system includes side impact sensors adjacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occupant protection WARNING e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the side curtain airbag is located eers Side ere Inflatable Gaai SABIC should remain free from any obstructions NOTE Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pretensioners between you and the side airbags the performance and or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle could be adversely affected and or objects could may deploy be pushed into you causing serious injury e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbags Along with seat belts and pretensione
335. s Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors ee STARTING AND OPERATING e Various TPMS messages which display in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and e TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires A spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings I The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the EVIC will display one or more low pressure messages Left Front Left Rear Right Front Right Rear for three seconds and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing 329 Es 819793fc Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recom mended cold placard pressure inf
336. s be applied whenever the the instrument cluster will illuminate driver is not in the vehicle NOTE WARNING e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound the parking brake Always apply the parking to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle before attempting to move the vehicle movement and possible injury or damage e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving plied It does not show the degree of brake application unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front seriously or fatally injured wheels toward the curb ond downhill grade and pads i Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking child could operate power windows other con brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise trols or move the vehicle the load on the transmission locking mechanism may Ee ontinue ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 WARNING Continued e Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident Always fully apply the parki
337. s device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation s This Voice Command system allows you to i VR control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death When you press the Voice Command VR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the Voice Command EVR button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the Voice Command VR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At
338. s feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Tilt Mirrors Down in Reverse When ON is selected the outside rearview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition switch is in the ON position and the transmission is in the REVERSE posi tion The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of RE VERSE To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power WINDOW switches radio Uconnect Phone if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button unti
339. s includes the glove box light but not the trunk light To restore interior light operation either place the ignition in the ON position or cycle the light switch Dimmer Control The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel With the parking lights or headlights on rotating the dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the in strument panel lights and if so equipped the lighting in the door map pockets and cupholders Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Interior Light Defeat OFF Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer EVIC and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS p lt Ihe multifunction lever operates the windshield NS wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in the RUN position The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 031507267 Windshield Wiper Washer Control Rotate the end of th
340. s the G Force falls the peak forces will continue to display e Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the peak force values Digital Speedometer When selected this screen displays vehicle speed and records top speed e Press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for three seconds to toggle between current speed and top ru speed e To reset top speed quickly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when top speed is displayed 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Keyless Go Display If Equipped When the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed to change ignition switch positions the Keyless Go icon momentarily appears in the EVIC display showing the new ignition switch position 041008156 Keyless Go Display The round symbol in the middle rotates to point at the new ignition switch position If desired the ignition switch position graphic can be set to be constantly visible by pressing the EVIC MENU button until the display appears Refer to Keyless Go in Starting And Operating for more information NOTE Under certain conditions the display may be superseded by another display of higher priority But when the ignition switch position is changed the display always re appears Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS If Equipped Press and release the MENU button until Surround Sound displays in the EVIC The EVIC provides infor mation on the current surround mode e Stere
341. s to a com plete stop The distance and speed measurements will continue to display until the FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the current run and prepare the cluster to record a new run 1 8 Mile 1 4 Mile When selected this screen displays the time it takes the vehicle to travel 1 8 mile 1 4 mile within 30 seconds and the vehicle s speed when it reaches 1 8 mile 1 4 mile e The feature will ready when the vehicle is at 0 mph 0 km h The word READY will flash when condi tions are met for the event to begin e Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1 8 mile 1 4 mile in less then 30 seconds e The time and speed will continue to display until the FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed e Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the current run and display the vehicle s best 1 8 mile 1 4 mile run N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 e To clear the vehicle s best 1 8 mile 1 4 mile run press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for five seconds Instantaneous G Force When selected this screen displays the current G Force longitudinal and lateral along with a friction circle that displays the directions of the forces Peak G Force When selected this screen displays all four G force values two longitudinal and two lateral e When a force greater than zero is measured the display will update the value as it climbs A
342. se Con trol ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped ACC Ready When the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system is activated Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped ACC Set After setting the desired speed in the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped Driver Override If you apply the accelerator after setting the desired speed in the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 e Distance Set After changing the desired following distance in the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system this message will display momentarily Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle 1f equipped Attention If the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance this message will flash and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity When this occurs you should immediately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of
343. sing the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the heating element and or degrade the material of the seat Folding Rear Seat The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area Pull on the loops shown in the illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks These loops can be tucked away when not in use Folding Rear Seats When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 WARNING DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED This feature allows the driver to store up to two different e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into memory profiles for easy recall through a Memory position If the seatback is not securely locked into switch Each memory profile contains desired position position the seat will not provide the proper settings for the driver seat side mirrors adjustable stability for child seats and or pa
344. sly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera ture controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the
345. ss the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter After the last door is closed or if all doors are closed the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm itself in about 16 seconds During that 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M time the Vehicle Security Light will flash If it does not illuminate the Vehicle Security Alarm is not arming In addition if you open a door during the arming period the Vehicle Security Alarm will cancel the arming pro cess If you wish to rearm the Vehicle Security Alarm after closing the door you must repeat one of the previously described arming sequences Vehicles Equipped with Keyless Go Press the Keyless Go Start Stop button until the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC indicates that the vehicle ignition is OFF refer to Starting Proce dures in Starting And Operating for further informa tion Then either press the power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger door is open press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter LOCK button or press the Passive Entry Door Handle LOCK button refer to Door Locks in Things To Know Before Starting for further information To Disarm the System Vehicles Not Equipped with Keyless Go Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position NOTE e The driver s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE tr
346. ssengers An pedals power tilt telescopic steering column and a set of improperly latched seat could cause serious injury desired radio station presets Your Remote Keyless Entry The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the RKE transmitter can also be programmed to recall the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down same positions when the unlock button is pressed position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in an accident Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie The Memory switch is located on the driver s door trim panel The switch contains an 5 SET button to activate the memory save function It also contains a rocker switch labeled with the number 1 and the number 2 The rocker switch allows the driver to recall either of two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the appro Memory Switch Programming the Memory Feature To create a new memory profile perform the following NOTE Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing profile from memory 1 Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences i e seat side mirror adjustable pedals power tilt and telescopic steering column and radio station pre sets 2 Press and release the SET button on the Memory switch then press the side of the rocker switch labeled 1 withi
347. st a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and younger should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Autom
348. st one valid Key Fob in the vehicle or insert a valid Key Fob into the ignition switch if the Start Stop button is removed and rotate it to the RUN 2 position Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Check the vehicle for tampering ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or unlock any door The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned ON from the LOCK position 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position unless the overhead map reading lights are turned on manually REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk or activate the Panic Alarm from dis tances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE transmitter however the buttons on the remaining RKE transmitters will continue to work Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and a
349. standing Your Instrument Panel for further information SmartBeam If Equipped The SmartBeam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle spe cific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view To Activate 1 Select Automatic High Beams ON through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 2 Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO position 3 Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to the high beam position NOTE This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 25 mph 40 km h To Deactivate Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the SmartBeam system 1 Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights from the high beam to the low beam position 2 Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO to the on position NOTE Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Also dirt
350. t 346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES This kit will provide a temporary tire seal allowing you TIREFIT Kit Components and Operation to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles 160 km with a maximum speed of 55 mph 88 km hr AARP p TIREFIT Storage T The TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk E Oo 060410595 1 Sealant Bottle 2 Deflation Button If Equipped 3 Pressure Gauge TIREFIT Location 4 Power Button 5 Mode Select Knob 6 Sealant Hose Clear with Yellow Cap 7 Air Pump Hose Black 8 Power Plug Using the Mode Select Knob and Hoses Your TIREFIT kit may be equipped with either of the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode Selecting Air Mode Turn the Mode Select Knob 5 to this position for air pump operation only Use the Black Air Pump Hose 7 Zl when selecting this mode WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347 Selecting Sealant Mode Turn the Mode Select Knob 5 to this position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant why and to inflate the tire Use the Sealant daw Hose clear hose with the yellow cap 6 when selecting this mode Using the Power Button Push and release the Power Button 4 once to turn ON the TIREFIT kit Push and release the Power Button 4 again to turn OFF the TIRE FIT kit Using the Deflation Button If Equipped 9 Press the Deflation Button 2 to reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes over inflated 348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIE
351. t ORE RR EOS Ro A Rp EA 44 81 Body Mechanism Lubrication 977 B Pilat Location ooste sake ER ERROR REM ES 313 Brake Assist DYSIE scares 2 ods ES RTE SRE DA 302 Brake Control System Electronic 300 Peake PI Se guceuneae sage d oe a wee uo ee 4 414 ENE Ui is sos dap ea ae ae koe burg e dedos 295 Drake VSEM CL m 297 367 Anti Lock ADS 20544542444 64044404 298 301 Fluid Check ist eken De eo ES eeu Hs 388 414 Master Cyliidel 4 su sacs pe bee de ER Eod e a 388 Ici AP ee oe Gk n HEES 295 Warne Light apad et uen ERA EN RS 192 297 Drakes 502292993 EE EE eos EE eee 297 387 Brake Transmission Interlock 283 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle Bm LOAGdOG HBA4 TI T GGIILLILLLLILL Id Brightness Interior Lights soas ERROR ERIS 147 Bulb KeplacemMent soie 4 poires a ems 406 407 Bulbs LIS HE esc SERE ose se d KORE 83 406 Calibration Compass a des 4 pea oh dex E ed END HOS 218 Capacities EIU asse aso ter esca RE RS 412 Caps Filler rnm 337 CUL EHSIBO ARE EE ue v os V poate D us 271 POW DIBBSENID criard ER READ Ri pas 294 Radiator Coolant Pressure 385 Car Washes 445 99 29 9 3 9 9374 PURA beet eke es 393 Carbon Monoxide Warning 80 337 Cargo Vehicle Loading ia ad 33 2944 red 340 Cellular Phone leen 93 263 Cernhicabon Label cinco sd 6a a RA ow ed 340 Capp Tite NS sass bea acca d RO ERE SE Ses 309 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator
352. t will flash at a fast rate for approxi e mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 20 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is placed in the RUN position 21 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check A when the ignition switch is placed in the RUN position This light will also turn on while the engine is running if there is a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If the light comes on while the engine is running safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible place the shift lever in PARK and cycle the ignition through the ACC and RUN positions The light should 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required In this case you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing Also have the system checked by an authorized dealer if the light does not come on during starting i Fach tire including the spare if provided by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure lab
353. t you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 1 Clean with a wet soft rag or micro fiber towel A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric oun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Cleaning the Center Console Cupholders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cupholder in the center console NOTE The cupholder cannot be removed 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FUSES CAUTION Integrated Power Module The Integrated Power Module IPM is located in the engine compartment This module contains fuses and relays e When installing the integrated power module cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do s
354. th etc N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the va button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the Sve button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the Uconnect
355. th temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle 320 STARTING AND OPERATING ee loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera Radial Ply Tires tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading WARNING and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of
356. the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICL
357. the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ESP cannot prevent accidents including those result ing from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe at tentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 304 STARTING AND OPERATING ee The ESP system has three available operating modes ESP On This is the normal operating mode for the ESP Whenever the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving situations The ESP should only be turned OFF for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs Partial Off The Partial Off mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired It is also intended for driving in deep snow sand or gravel This mode disables the TCS por
358. the Passive Entry feature to unlock the vehicle press the Start Stop button one time if the Keyless Go Start Stop button is installed in the ignition switch otherwise insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn to the RUN position Refer to the Passive Entry System under Door Locks for more information NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Go feature the ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle e For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Go feature the message Insert Key Turn To On will display in the EVIC until you insert the Key Fob Once inserted the message Turn To On will display in the EVIC until you turn the Key Fob to ON e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Go feature the message Push Button Insert Key will display in the EVIC until you push the START button DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock plunger on each door trim panel downward To unlock each door pull the door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward Door Lock Plunger arra a a PE E ra 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door WARNING Continued the door will lock Make sure the key is not inside the e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving vehicle before closing the door unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a WARNING number of reasons A chi
359. the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk Refer to Passive Entry System If Equipped under Door Locks for further information Using the Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 e You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the 1 Battery access is through a door located on the rear of vehicle when using the transmitter to turn off the the Key Fob Insert a small flat blade screwdriver into the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted slot and gently pry open the access door by the system pas Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
360. the features Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to select a feature The following describes each feature and its operation 0 60 mph 0 100 km h When selected this screen displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph 0 to 100 km h within 10 seconds e The feature will ready when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph 0 km h The word READY will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin e Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph 100 km h in less then 10 seconds e The time will continue to display until the FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed e Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the current run time and display the vehicle s best 0 60 mph 0 100 km h time e To clear the vehicle s best 0 60 mph 0 100 km h time press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for five seconds Braking Distance When selected this screen displays the vehicle s braking distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was depressed 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se This feature will only function when applying the brakes at speeds above 30 mph 48 km h Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature The word READY will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin The distance and speed measurements display while the event is taking place The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake pedal is released before the vehicle come
361. the forward edge of the center console Front Seat Cupholders Rear Seat Cupholders 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE STORAGE Console Features The center console contains two shift bezel cubby bins with rubber mats for holding small items For vehicles not equipped with navigation radio the console also contains an extra storage bin located below the climate control which holds up to four CD jewel cases Two separate storage compartments are also located underneath the armrest dod Release button for bottom compartment 2 Release button for top compartment 3 Top Compartment 4 Bottom Compartment You can access this compartment directly without first exposing the upper compartment by oper ating the Release Button for the bottom compartment with the armrest down N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 The top compartment holds small items such as a pen and note pad while the larger bottom compartment will hold CDs and alike The bottom compartment also con tains a 12 Volt power outlet and a molded in coin holder designed to hold various size coins A slot in the left and right side of the top compartment provides clearance for power cords to pass conveniently out of the bin with the lid closed This feature is ideal for games laptop s cellular phones or other electrical equipment The con sole s front opening lid allows for easy access to these compartments
362. tically make the adjustment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the OFF position on the fan control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake 72 F 22 C is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person however this may vary NOTE The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic operation Air conditioning in this system is automatic Pressing the air conditioning control button while in AUTO mode will cause the indicator in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and request ing the air conditioning is not necessary The system will automatically control recircu lation However pressing the recirculation con trol button will temporarily put the system in Recirculation mode 10 minutes This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation will cause the indicator in the control button to illuminate NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 After 10 minutes the system will return to normal AUTO Manual Operation mode function and the indicator will turn off This system offers a full complement of manual override NOTE features which consist of blower preferred automatic e The surface of the climate control panel and the top mode prefer
363. ting Procedures in Start ing And Operating for further details Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled 2 The transmission is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the Key Fob in the ignition switch 2 Cycle the ignition switch between OFF and RUN and then back to OFF four times ending up in the OFF position do not start engine 3 Press the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Cycle the ignition after performing steps one to four for the feature to be enabled or disabled 6 Repeat these steps
364. tion press the button a second time Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements Continued UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS W Instrument Panel Features 187 B Keyless Go Display If Equipped Mi Instrument Cluster ess 188 O Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS W Instrument Cluster Descriptions 189 B ee entstand lll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 199 ERC om EL Saga aos ER zs TM 1 D Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC EEG Che RID PORT DOO uie drepses Em Ibi PET RAS eae hee eee ee eee a 202 O System Warnings Customer Information O Engine Oil Change Indicator System 206 RE ae O Trip Functions 223243 464 HEBR 404 sds 206 Se ee eerie vm EENS Features es eae 3 8 RES Xo 216 O Performance Pages If Equipped 208 N Setting The Analog Clock 22 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se lll Media Center 730N 430 RER REN RBZ AM FM Stereo Radio And CD DVD HDD NAV f Eguipp d oos aiat a dais d dea O Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped D Operating Instructions Uconnect phone If Equipped oO Clock Setting Procedure
365. tion of the ESP and raises the threshold for ESP activation which allows for more wheel spin than what ESP normally allows The ESP OFF switch is located in the switch bank near the top center of the instrument panel To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily press the ESP OFF switch and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illumi nate To turn the ESP ON again momentarily press the ESP OFF switch and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will turn off NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn the ESP ON again by momen tarily pressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion Full Off This mode is intended for off highway or off road use only and should not be used on any public roadways In this mode all TCS and ESP stability features are turned OFF To enter the Full Off mode press and hold the ESP OFF switch for five seconds while the vehicle is ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 stopped with the engine running After five seconds a chime will sound the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESP OFF message will display in the vehicle odometer Press and release the TRIP ODOM ETER button located on the instrument cluster to c
366. to meet all emissions regulations and provide excel lent fuel economy and performance when using high quality premium unleaded 800dfab amp gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or higher RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD 9 Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING 333 Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWEC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components
367. to one of the following positions e Defrost Q7 Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles e Defrost Floor ve Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets ef and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles e Floor Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 e Bi Level ugh Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel and through the outlets located on the floor Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow e Panel gt gt Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow e Air Conditioning Control Press this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual operation only When the air con ditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the mode control dial Press this button a second time to turn off the air 268 UNDERSTANDING Y
368. tomatic Locking Mode in order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed Refer to Automatic Locking Mode A locking clip should not be necessary once the automatic locking feature is enabled Position the shoulder and lap belt on the child restraint The automatic locking retractor is activated by first attaching the child seat then pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor then allowing the webbing to retract back into the retractor Tighten web bing To release simply unbuckle the seat belt by de pressing the button allowing the webbing to retract into the retractor In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap 1 Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint Tet
369. ton Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types 16 Digit Character Dis No program type or un defined None Adult Hits Adlt Hit NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 16 Digit Character Dis play Countr Countr News News By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM oes If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station 16 Digit Character Dis play Program Type Program Type 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE
370. tructure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the dire
371. ts lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi tions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 022605385 Front Airbag Components 1 Airbags 2 Knee Bolsters NOTE These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Fr
372. tside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Outside Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged The hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage The hinge has three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Driver s Automatic Dimming Mirror The driver s outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside mirror The mirror will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Tilt Mirror in Reverse The Tilt Mirror in Reverse feature tilts the outside rear view mirrors downward when the ignition is placed in the RUN position and the transmission is in REVERSE This feature provides the driver with a better view of the ground and vehicle in the area of the rear tires when backing up
373. twice if programmed Then the NOTE To Enter Remote Start Mode on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash and the horn engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the RUN position NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 With Passive Entry Use
374. u in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or RUN position If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbag system is not on and the airbags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately six to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup o Y It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the airbag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airb
375. u will want to have the airbags ready to Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad 9 inflate for your protection in a collision While vanced airbag system The airbag may inflate the airbag system is designed to be mainte accidentally or may not function properly if modi nance free if any of the following occurs have fications are made Take your vehicle to an autho 45 authorized dealer service the system immediately rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser vice If your seat including your trim cover and The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for cushion needs to be serviced in any way includ approximately six to eight seconds when the ignition ing removal or loosening tightening of seat attach switch is first placed into the RUN position ment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accesso ries may be used If it is necessary to modify the l l l l airbag system for persons with disabilities contact The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or your authorized dealer remains on while driving e The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the ap proximate six to eight second interval NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection
376. uld read the instructions provided with your WARNING child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoul 2 Relying n the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work der belts properly with your seat belt to restrain you properly In The driver and front passenger seats should be moved some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Always wear your seat belts even though you have Airbags room to inflate airbags Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle Continued has side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Side airbags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or sid
377. ure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and MOPAR Carpet Cleaner or equivalent for carpeting Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth or MOPAR Satin Select or equivalent Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liqui
378. urer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 1 800 485 2001 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 438 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certai
379. urning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list Turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the current track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the lt lt RW button Holding the lt lt RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five seconds Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track If the lt lt SEEK button is pressed during the first two seconds of the track it will jump to the previous track in the list pressing this button at any other time in the track it will jump to the beginning of the track Pressing the SEEK gt gt button during play mode it will jump to the next track in the list While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps List Or Browse Mode to the next screen of data for that track Once all During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described screens have been viewed the last INFO button press below will bring up List mode L
380. utton on the Memory switch then press and release the side of the rocker switch labeled 1 or 2 accordingly Memory Profile Set 1 or 2 will display in the EVIC 4 Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your memory settings by pressing the SET S button followed by the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4 above Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will display in the EVIC To recall the memory settings for driver one press MEMORY button number 1 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two press MEMORY button number 2 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons S 1 or 2 on the driver s door during a recall When a recall is cancelled the driver seat side mirror adjustable pedals power tilt and telescopic steer ing column stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected Easy Entry Exit Seat Available with Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility whe
381. vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Headlight Switch Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Turn it to the second detent for headlight parking light and instrument panel light operation Automatic Headlights This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A AUTO position When the system is on the headlight time delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition in the OFF position To turn the automatic system off move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come on in the automatic mode Headlights On with Wipers When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Under
382. w it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between RE VERSE and DRIVE Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spin ning the wheels is most effective NOTE Turn off the Electronic Stability Program ESP if equipped or Traction Control System TCS if equipped before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Starting and Operating for further information 360 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES See CAUTION WARNING e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener tween Ist and REVERSE do not spin the wheels ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage even failure of the axle and tires A tire could may result explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no transmission shifting occurring TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Without The Ignition Key Fob S
383. ween Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger side of the vehicle grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati cally NOTE All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver s door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the passenger compartment for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters If one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected the Passive Entry System auto matically unlocks ALL vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locke
384. will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Continued the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 300 STARTING AND OPERATING M All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer Anti Lock Brake Light The Anti Lock Brake Light monitors the anti lock brake system The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the Anti Lock Brake Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the
385. will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the RUN position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show
386. witch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands Track to change the track e Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track e Channel Number to change the channel by its e Main Menu to switch to the main menu spoken number e Next Channel to select the next channel 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the following commands Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo e New Memo to record a new memo During the e Delete All to delete all memos recording you may press the Voice Command SVR button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of the following commands Save to save the memo Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the Voice Command vr button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo System Setup To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you may say the following commands Language German Language Dutch Language Ita
387. y Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If
388. y System Illuminated iss 02504254 eu ES 19 Ira i 334 Exhaust Gas Caution 000 80 337 lo de de ET AE N EE OR ed 80 379 PxienOr Folding Mirrors 4 524 Sane de Pine oe ae di Ext ior Lighting oeteeese hog don he xS pee d 141 Peor Lights 29d 35929 Pea ES tegen d P 83 Filler Location Fuel sites ike MEER E ES wi 337 Filters Par Cleaner 5 e 492 3 M94 9 3 cu EZ ES 372 Air Conditioni g ss eass acs Bert Rodas 269 376 oie N soup Pr er opis ER TE 372 413 Engine OILDISPOSRL uus exu dede eR 39 dann 372 Flashers Hazard Waming osis one eGo s aiioe SR 344 Teri io iis 98 BEER eee RD ca 83 145 189 Flash To Pass 4 24 44 os aie godere GEES b EH 146 Hooded Engine Starting sie seke pis Se Re De RE 278 Floor Console 144 23 9S 178 Fluid Drake 2424332254990 645054 BRA Ss 414 ee Id Puid Capacikes 2 555545 eR ASIE RE AA ER RS 412 Fluid Leaks nsus 455456868 HE ES REG 83 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 390 luci 2 3 ee ce be Boies AAS EE AE AR a ek 388 COOMNG Syse soene EE RED RE BRAD Re 382 Eie die Od ui soas Sans EE ee RA NG a be 370 Power GIENE sis 44 dues rh OAR d DREK 294 ES e E es dee eas Pee Hews ENS T 413 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 413 bod lis sain ee cs at oo gad oe hoe 2 oa 145 189 Folding Rear DEAE sais ee iden BR EE CR ICH ECRIRE 134 Precio DEDERE Vlie scs zu ecu Bot PERK 359 Pee MAA RE KERE EE EK 333 RAGS AREAS EE SET EE EE ERG
389. ystem ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving then the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required However the con ventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch placed in the RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 10 Electronic Stability Program ESP Brake Assist System BAS Malfunction Indicator Light The yellow Electronic Stability Program ESP Brake Assist System BAS Malfunction Indi cator Light will turn on when the key in the ignition switch placed in the RUN position The light should go out with the engine running If the light remains on after several ignition cycles and the ESP BAS vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected WARNING If a warning light remains on the system may not be working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or BAS Under certain driving conditions where ESP or BAS
390. ze only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre ey lin P Rate Gems 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer t

Chrysler 300SRT Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents